Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

Manual Bu 0500 GB: Intelligent Drivesystems, Worldwide Services

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 173

Intelligent Drivesystems, Worldwide Services

MANUAL BU 0500 GB

NORDAC SK 500E
Frequency Inverters

BU 0500 GB

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG


Rudolf-Diesel-Straße 1
D-22941 Bargteheide
Tel.: +49 45 32 - 40 10
Fax: +49 45 32 - 40 12 53
NORDAC SK 500E Manual Safety instructions

NORDAC SK 500E Frequency Inverter

Safety and operating instructions for drive power converters


(as per: Low voltage guideline 73/23/EEC )

1. General 4. Installation
During operation, drive power converters may have, depending The installation and cooling of the equipment must be
on their protection class, live, bare, moving or rotating parts or hot implemented as per the regulations in the corresponding
surfaces. documentation.
Unauthorised removal of covers, improper use, incorrect The drive power converter must be protected against
installation or operation leads to the risk of serious personal injury impermissible loads. In particular, no components must be bent
or material damage. and/or the insulation distances changed during transport and
Further information can be found in this documentation. handling. Touching of electronic components and contacts must
be avoided.
All transportation, installation and initialisation and maintenance Drive power converters have electrostatically sensitive
work must be carried out by qualified personnel (compliant with components that can be easily damaged by incorrect handling.
IEC 364, CENELEC HD 384, DIN VDE 0100, IEC 664 or DIN Electrical components must not be mechanically damaged or
VDE 0110, and national accident prevention regulations). destroyed (this may cause a health hazard!).
For the purposes of these basic safety instructions, qualified
personnel are persons who are familiar with the erection,
5. Electrical connection
installation, commissioning and operation of this product and who
have the relevant qualifications for their work. When working on drive power inverters which are connected to
high voltages, the applicable national accident prevention
regulations must be complied with (e.g. VBG 4).
2. Proper use
The electrical installation must be implemented as per the
Drive power converters are components intended for installation applicable regulations (e.g. cable cross-section, fuses, earth lead
in electrical systems or machines. connections). Further information is contained in the
When being installed in machines, the drive power converter documentation.
cannot be commissioned (i.e. implementation of the proper use) Information about EMC-compliant installation – such as shielding,
until it has been ensured that the machine meets the provisions of earthing, location of filters and installation of cables – can be
the EC directive 89/392/EEC (machine directive); EN 60204 must found in the drive power converter documentation. These
also be complied with. instructions must also always be observed for drive inverters with
Commissioning (i.e. implementation of the proper use) is only CE approval. Compliance with the limit values specified in the
permitted when the EMC directive (89/336/EEC) is complied with. EMC regulations is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the
system or machine.
The drive power converters meet the requirements of the low
voltage directive 73/23/EEC. The harmonised standards in prEN
50178/DIN VDE 0160, together with EN 60439-1/VDE 0660 Part 6. Operation
500 and EN 60146/VDE 0558 were applied for the drive power
Systems where drive power converters are installed must be
converter.
equipped, where necessary, with additional monitoring and
Technical data and information for connection conditions can be protective equipment as per the applicable safety requirements,
found on the rating plate and in the documentation, and must be e.g. legislation concerning technical equipment, accident
complied with. prevention regulations, etc. Modifications to the drive power
converter using the operating software are permitted.
3. Transport, storage After the drive power converter is disconnected from the power
supply, live equipment components and power connections
Information regarding transport, storage and correct handling should not be touched immediately because of possibly charged
must be complied with. capacitors. Comply with the applicable information signs located
on the drive power converter.
All covers must be kept closed during operation.

7. Maintenance and repairs


The manufacturer documentation must be complied with.

These safety instructions must be kept in a safe place!

2 BU 0500 GB
NORDAC SK 500E Manual About this document

Documentation
Bezeichnung: BU 0500 DE
Mat. Nr.: 607 50 01
Series: SK 500E
Device series: SK 500E, SK 505E, SK 510E, SK 511E, SK 515E
SK 520E, SK 530E, SK 535E
Device types: SK 5xxE-250-112-O ... SK 5xxE-750-112-O
(0.25kW … 0.75kW, 1~ 115V, output 3~ 230V)
SK 5xxE-250-323-A ... SK 5xxE-112-323-A
(0.25kW … 2.2kW, 1/3~ 230V, output 3~ 230V)
(3.0kW … 11.0kW, 3~ 230V, output 3~ 230V)
SK 5xxE-550-340-A ... SK 5xxE-222-340-A
(0.55kW … 22.0kW, 3~ 400V, output 3~ 400V)

Version list
Designation of Software Comments
previous issues Version
BU 0500 DE, March 2005 V 1.1 R1 First issue based on BU 0750 DE
BU 0500 DE, May 2005 V 1.1 R2 Revision, supplementation and correction
BU 0500 DE, June 2005 V 1.2 R0 Supplementation and correction P220, additionally P466/P554
EMC standards
BU 0500 DE, August 2005 V 1.2 R0 Jumper illustration mains/motor, information on array levels with
SK TU3-PAR, P107 lifting gear, P215, P420...425 + P470 terminal
numbers
BU 0500 DE, December 2005 V 1.3 R1 Brake resistance, NED address, Caution hot, output current
2.2kW/230V, P415 process controller, radio interference
suppression level 400V, E13.2 supplemented
BU 0500 DE, May 2006 V 1.4 R0 Switchover of nominal voltage/current value is reversed, Section
Mat. No. 607 5001 / 1806 2.9 illustration corrected, new parameter P534  Error 12.1 and
12.2, P513 adjustment range extended.
BU 0500 DE, October 2006 V 1.5 R0 115V devices, information on repairs, P218, P400/546=46, P420-
Mat. No. 607 5001 / 4006 425=3-Wire-Control, P520 fmin, P543=22, P748 -01, UL-Data Sect
7.5, 3-Wire-Control (Fct. P420-425)
BU 0500 DE, May 2007 V 1.6 R0 Note on SK530E integrated, DIP switch 485/CAN, EMV kit, further
Mat. No. 607 5001 / 2207 details in P744-746, E004 extended to error 4.1, P217

BU 0500 DE, August 2007 V 1.6 R0 UL text, note on functional safety “pulse lock”, P217 vibration
Mat. No. 607 5001 / 3307 damping, P219, value range P414, P418=33, P420…425=71/72,
P509=10, P515, P533, P535 extended, P551, P552. P557
extended, P559 to 30 sec., P737 extended, parameter overview
expanded by P6xx
BU 0500 DE, February 2008 V 1.7 R0 External 24V supply (SK 5x5E) CP=Cold Plate version, push-
Mat. No. 607 5001 / 0808 through technique, SK TU3-POT, KTY-84 function Section
4.3/P400/405, P551 corrected, evaluate HTL sensor via DIN
(P421/423, P461, P462, P463), P560 correction, E013.2 / E018
corrected
BU 0500 DE, Mai 2008 V 1.7 R0 RoHS-conform, WAGO-RJ45 terminals, Ri analog input,
Mat. Nr. 607 5001 / 2008 P434/441/450/455=18 FI ready, dimensions external heat sink
technology, addresses
BU 0500 DE, April 2009 V 1.7 R0 Addition of the series of devices (up to 22kW) BG5 and BG6,
Mat. Nr. 607 5001 / 1409 correction of errors, extension of functions / changes to parameters
P108, P113; P434, P441, P450, P455, P481, P464, P707
Caution: Incompatibility of the function of parameter P113 with older
software versions

Published by
Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG
Rudolf- Diesel- Str. 1  D-22941 Bargteheide  Germany  http://www.nord.com/
Telephone +49 (0) 45 32 / 401-0  Fax +49 (0) 45 32 / 401-555

BU 0500 GB 3
NORDAC SK 500E Manual About this document

Intended use of the frequency inverter


Compliance with the operating instructions is the requirement for error-free operation and the
fulfilment of any warranty claims. You must first read these operating instructions before
working with the device!
These operating instructions contain important information about service. They must therefore
be kept close to the device.
The SK 500E frequency inverters are devices for industrial and commercial plants for operating
three-phase asynchronous motors with squirrel-cage rotors. These motors must be suitable for
operation with frequency inverters, other loads must not be connected to the devices.
The SK 500E frequency inverters are devices for stationary installation in control cabinets. All
details regarding technical data and permissible conditions at the installation site must be
complied with.
Commissioning (implementation of the intended use) is not permitted until it has been ensured
that the machine complies with the EMC directive 89/336/EEC and that the conformity of the
end product meets the machine directive 89/392/EEC (note EN 60204).
 Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG, 2009

4 BU 0500 GB
Table of contents

1 GENERAL INFORMATION .......................................................................................................... 7


1.1 Overview................................................................................................................... 8
1.2 Delivery..................................................................................................................... 9
1.3 Scope of supply ........................................................................................................ 9
1.4 Safety and installation information ......................................................................... 10
1.5 Approvals................................................................................................................11
1.5.1 European EMC guideline ............................................................................................ 11
1.5.2 UL approval -File No. E171342 ................................................................................... 11
1.5.3 C-Tick labelling – No. N 23134.................................................................................... 11
1.5.4 RoHS-conform ............................................................................................................ 11
1.6 Type code / device design...................................................................................... 12
2 ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION ............................................................................................ 13
2.1 Installation ..............................................................................................................13
2.2 Dimensions ............................................................................................................. 14
2.2.1 SK 500E, standard version.......................................................................................... 14
2.2.2 SK 500E…-CP in ColdPlate version ........................................................................... 15
2.3 Mounting dimensions ............................................................................................. 16
2.3.1 SK 500E, standard version.......................................................................................... 16
2.3.2 SK 500E…-CP in ColdPlate version ........................................................................... 17
2.4 External heat sink kit .............................................................................................. 18
2.4.1 Mounting the external heat sink kit: ............................................................................. 19
2.4.2 Dimensions of external heat sink ................................................................................ 20
2.5 EMC- Kit ................................................................................................................. 21
2.6 Brake resistor (BR) ................................................................................................. 22
2.6.1 Electrical data BR ........................................................................................................ 23
2.6.2 Dimensions bottom-mounted BR ................................................................................ 24
2.6.3 Dimensions Chassis BR .............................................................................................. 24
2.7 Line choke (accessory) .......................................................................................... 25
2.8 Output choke (accessories).................................................................................... 27
2.9 Wiring guidelines .................................................................................................... 28
2.10 Electrical connection ............................................................................................ 29
2.11 Electrical connection of power unit ....................................................................... 29
2.11.1 Mains supply (X1-PE, L1, L2/N, L3) .......................................................................... 31
2.11.2 Multi-function relay (X3 – 1, 2, 3, 4) .......................................................................... 31
2.11.3 Motor cable (X2 - U, V, W, earth) .............................................................................. 32
2.11.4 Braking resistor connection (X2 - +B, -B) .................................................................. 32
2.11.5 Motor – PTC connection (X13 – T1, T2) (size 5 and above) ..................................... 33
2.11.6 External control voltage, 24 V supply (X12 – 44, 40) (Size 5 and above).................. 33
2.11.7 Safe pulse block 24 V (X8 - 86, 87, 89, 88) ............................................................... 34
2.11.8 DC-coupling (X2 - +B, -DC) ....................................................................................... 35
2.11.9 Jumper “A” mains input ............................................................................................. 36
2.11.10 Jumper “B” motor output ......................................................................................... 37
2.11.11 Internal jumper switching......................................................................................... 38
2.12 Electrical connection of the control unit ................................................................ 39
2.12.1 Terminal blocks ......................................................................................................... 40
2.12.2 Details of the SK 5x0E control connections............................................................... 42
2.12.3 Details of the SK 5x5E control connections............................................................... 46
2.13 Colour and contact assignments for the incremental encoder. ............................ 50
2.14 RJ45 WAGO connection module ......................................................................... 50
2.15 Setpoint card ± 10V for NORDAC SK 500E ......................................................... 51
3 DISPLAY AND OPERATION ...................................................................................................... 52
3.1 Modular modules .................................................................................................... 52
3.2 Technology unit overview ....................................................................................... 53
3.2.1 SimpleBox, SK CSX-0 ................................................................................................. 54

BU 0500 GB 5
NORDAC SK 500E Manual

3.2.2 ControlBox, SK TU3-CTR ........................................................................................... 56


3.2.3 ParameterBox, SK TU3-PAR ...................................................................................... 62
3.2.4 ParameterBox parameters .......................................................................................... 69
3.2.5 ParameterBox error messages ................................................................................... 73
3.2.6 Profibus module, SK TU3-PBR, …-24V ...................................................................... 75
3.2.7 CANopen module, SK TU3-CAO ................................................................................ 75
3.2.8 DeviceNet module, SK TU3-DEV................................................................................ 76
3.2.9 InterBus module, SK TU3-IBS .................................................................................... 76
3.2.10 SK TU3-AS1, AS interface ........................................................................................ 77
3.2.11 PotentiometerBox, SK TU3-POT .............................................................................. 77

4 COMMISSIONING .......................................................................................................................78
4.1 Factory settings ......................................................................................................78
4.2 Minimum configuration of control connections .......................................................79
4.3 KTY84-130 Connection (software version 1.7 and above) ....................................80
4.4 Frequency addition and subtraction via operating boxes....................................81
5 PARAMETERISATION ...............................................................................................................82
5.1 Operating display ....................................................................................................84
5.2 Basic parameters ....................................................................................................86
5.3 Motor / characteristic curve parameters .................................................................92
5.4 Control parameters .................................................................................................98
5.5 Control terminals.................................................................................................. 101
5.6 Additional parameters .......................................................................................... 120
5.7 Positioning ........................................................................................................... 131
5.8 Information ........................................................................................................... 131
5.9 Parameter monitoring, User settings ................................................................... 138
6 ERROR MESSAGES ............................................................................................................... 145
6.1 SimpleBox / ControlBox display .......................................................................... 145
6.2 Table of possible error messages ....................................................................... 145
7 TECHNICAL DATA .................................................................................................................. 150
7.1 SK 500E: General Data ....................................................................................... 150
7.2 Electrical data 115V ............................................................................................. 151
7.3 Electrical data 230V ............................................................................................. 151
7.4 Electrical data 400V ............................................................................................. 153
7.5 Electrical data for UL certification ........................................................................ 154
7.6 General conditions for ColdPlate technology ...................................................... 157
8 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ................................................................................................. 160
8.1 Setpoint processing in the SK 500E .................................................................... 160
8.2 Process controller ................................................................................................ 162
8.2.1 Process controller application example ..................................................................... 162
8.2.2 Process controller parameter settings ....................................................................... 163
8.3 Electromagnetic compatibility Abbreviation: EMC) ........................................ 164
8.4 EMC limit value classes ....................................................................................... 164
8.5 Reduced output power ........................................................................................ 166
8.5.1 Increased heat dissipation due to pulse frequency ................................................... 166
8.5.2 Reduced overcurrent due to time .............................................................................. 167
8.5.3 Reduced overcurrent due to output frequency .......................................................... 168
8.5.4 Reduced output current due to mains voltage........................................................... 169
8.5.5 Reduced output current due to the heat sink temperature ........................................ 169
8.6 Operation with FI circuit breakers ........................................................................ 169
8.7 Maintenance and servicing information ............................................................... 170
9 KEYWORD INDEX ................................................................................................................... 172
10 REPRESENTATIVES / BRANCHES ..................................................................................... 174

6 BU 0500 GB
1 General information

1 General information
The NORDAC SK 500E is based on the tried and tested Nord platform. These devices feature a compact
design with optimum control characteristics.
These devices are provided with sensorless vector current control system which in combination with
asynchronous three-phase motor types constantly ensures an optimised voltage-to-frequency ratio. This has
the following significance for the drive: Peak start-up and overload torques at constant speed.
This series of devices can be adapted to individual requirements by means of the modular technology boxes.
Due to the numerous setting options, these inverters are capable of controlling all three-phase motors. The
power range is from 0.25kW to 22.0kW with integrated mains filter.
This manual is based on the device software V1.7 R0 (see. P707) of SK 500E. If the frequency inverter used
has a different version, this may lead to some differences. If necessary, you can download the current manual
from the Internet (http://www.nord.com/).
For the SK 51xE/53xE there are additional descriptions for the functional safety (BU 0530) and the positioning
system (BU 0510). These contain all the necessary additional information for start-up.
If a bus system is used for communication, a corresponding description (BU 0020…BU 0090) is provided, or
this can be downloaded from the Internet (http://www.nord.com/).

In the standard version the device has a fixed cooling element, which causes corresponding heat dissipation if
it is installed in a control cabinet. In order to achieve less heat dissipation in the control cabinet or to enable a
smaller size, there are the following possibilities:
ColdPlate-Technology
Instead of a cooling element/fan, ColdPlate versions of the frequency inverter have a flat metal plate on the
rear side which is mounted on an existing mounting plate (e.g. the rear wall of the control cabinet) so as to
provide thermal conduction. The mounting surface can also be provided with a flow of cooling medium (water.
oil), which enables a better heat dissipation than air due to its greater thermal conductivity. Because the heat
dissipation does not take place in the control cabinet, the temperature of the interior remains considerably
lower, which results in a longer life span of the power electronics. The installation depth is also reduced and
the possible failure of the frequency inverter due to clogged air filters is avoided.
External heat sink technology
External heat sink technology is an optional supplement for ColdPlate devices. This is used if an external
cooling system is provided, but no liquid-cooled mounting plate is available. A cooling element is mounted on
the ColdPlate device, which passes through an opening in the rear panel of the control cabinet into the exterior
air-cooled environment. Convection takes place outside of the control cabinet, which results in the same
advantages as with ColdPlate technology.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 7


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

1.1 Overview
Properties of the basic device SK 500E:
 High starting torque and precise motor speed control setting with sensorless current vector control.
 Can be mounted next to each other without additional spacing
 Permissible ambient temperature range 0 to 50°C (please refer to the technical data)
 Integrated EMV mains filter for limit curve A1 (and B1 for size 1 - 4 devices) as per EN55011
(not for 115V devices)
 Automatic measurement of the stator resistance or determination of the precise motor data
 Programmable direct current braking
 Integrated brake chopper for 4 quadrant operation (optional brake resistors)
 5 digital inputs, 2 Analogue inputs, 2 relay messages, 1 analogue output
 Four separate online switchable parameter sets
 RS232/485 interface via RJ12 plug

Additional features of the SK 510E compared with the SK 500E:


 Functional safety – secure pulse block (Manual BU 0530)

Additional features of the SK 511E compared with the SK 510E:


 2 x CANbus/CANopen interfaces via RJ45 plug (Manual BU 0060)

Additional features of the SK 520E compared with the SK 500E:


 2 x CANbus/CANopen interfaces via RJ45 plug (Manual BU 0060)
 RS485 interface additionally via terminals
 2 x digital inputs and 2 x digital outputs
 Speed feedback by means of incremental rotation encoder input

Additional features of the SK 530E compared with the SK 500E:


 Integrated Posicon positioning control (Manual 0510)
 CANopen absolute value encoder evaluation
 Functional safety – secure pulse block (Manual BU 0530)

Differing features of the SK 5xxE-…-CP compared with SK 5xxE:


 ColdPlate or external heat sink technology (included in Manual BU 0500)

Differing features of the SK 5x5E compared with SK 5x0E:


 External 24V supply voltage (included in manual BU 0500), communication with the device can be
performed even without power supply.

Differing features of sizes 5 and 6 compared with sizes 1 to 4:


 Additional, separately mounted PTC input (potential isolated)
 External 24V supply voltage with automatic switchover to the internal 24V low voltage generator on
failure of the external control voltage.
 Processing of both bipolar and analog signals
NOTE: The features of the particular basic unit are different in the SK 500E series. These differences will
be pointed out in the course of this description (Section 2.12).

8 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


1 General information

1.2 Delivery
Check the equipment immediately after delivery/unpacking for transport damage such as deformation or loose
parts.
If there is any damage, contact the carrier immediately and implement a thorough assessment.

Important! This also applies even if the packaging is undamaged.

1.3 Scope of supply


Standard design: IP20
Integrated brake chopper
Integrated EMV mains filter for limit curve A1 as per EN55011
(not for 115V devices)
Blanking cover for technology unit slot
Screening terminal for control terminals
Covering for the control terminals
Operating manual

Available accessories: Braking resistor, for energy feedback (Section 2.6)


Interface converter RS232  RS485 (additional description BU 0010)
NORD CON, PC parameterising software > www.nord.com <
ePlan macros for producing electrical circuit diagrams > www.nord.com <
EMC Kit (SK EMC 2-1, SK EMC 2-2, SK EMC 2-3, SK EMC 2-4) Section. 2.5
Mains filter, line choke, output chokes

Technology unit,
Section 3.2: SK CSX-0, SimpleBox,
removable operating panel, 4 digit 7 segment LED display, single button control
SK TU3-CTR, ControlBox,
detachable operating panel, 4 figure 7 segment LED display, keyboard
SK TU3-PAR, ParameterBox,
removable control panel, multi-line plain language LCD display, keyboard
SK TU3-PBR, Profibus, additional unit for Profibus communication (1.5Mbaud)
SK TU3-PBR-24V, with external 24V supply(12Mbaud)
SK TU3-CAO, CANopen, bus switch-on
SK TU3-DEV, DeviceNet, Bus switch-on
SK TU3-IBS, InterBus, Bus switch-on
SK TU3-AS1, AS interface
SK TU3-POT, PotentiometerBox,
removable control panel for control with a potentiometer and two buttons

NOTE: Additional BUS descriptions are available (BU 0020… BU 0090)


> www.nord.com

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 9


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

1.4 Safety and installation information


NORDAC SK 500E frequency inverters are equipment for use in industrial high voltage systems and are
operated at voltages that could lead to severe injuries or death if they are touched.
 Installation and other work may only be carried out by qualified electricians and when the device is
disconnected. The manual must always be available for these persons and must be complied with.
 Local regulations for the installation of electrical equipment as well as for accident prevention must
be complied with.
 The equipment continues to carry hazardous voltages for up to 5 minutes after being switched off
at the mains.
 For single phase operation (230V) the mains impedance must be at least 100H for each
conductor. If this is not the case, a mains choke must be installed.
 For safe isolation from the mains, all poles of the supply cable to the frequency inverter must be
able to be disconnected.
 Even during motor standstill (e.g. caused by a release block, blocked drive or output terminal short
circuit), the line connection terminals, motor terminals and braking resistor terminals may still
conduct hazardous voltages. A motor standstill is not identical to galvanic isolation from the mains.
 Attention, even parts of the control card and, in particular, the connection plug for the removable
technology units can conduct hazardous voltages. The control terminals are mains voltage free.
 Warning, under certain settings the inverter can start automatically after the mains are switched on.
 The frequency inverter is only intended for permanent connection and may not be operated without
effective earthing connections that comply with local regulations for large leak currents (> 3.5mA).
EN50178 / VDE 0160 stipulates the installation of a second earthing conductor or an earthing
conductor cross-section of at least 10 mm2.
 Normal FI-circuit breakers are not suitable as the sole protection in three-phase frequency
inverters when local regulations do not permit a possible DC proportion in the faulty current. The FI
circuit breaker must be an all-mains sensitive FI circuit breaker (type B) as per EN 50178 / VDE
0160.
 In normal use, NORDAC 500E frequency inverters are maintenance free. The cooling surfaces
must be regularly cleaned with compressed air if the ambient air is dusty.

CAUTION
The heat sink and all other metal components can heat up to temperatures above
70°C.
When mounting, sufficient distance from neighbouring components must be
maintained. When working on the components, allow sufficient cooling time beforehand

ATTENTION The power unit can continue to carry voltages for up to 5 minutes after being switched
off at the mains. Inverter terminals, motor cables and motor terminals may carry
voltage!
Touching open or free terminals, cables and equipment components can lead to
severe injury or death!
Work may only be carried out by qualified specialist electricians and with the electrical
DANGER TO LIFE! supply to the equipment disconnected!

10 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


1 General information

 Children and the general public must be kept away from the equipment!
CAUTION
 The equipment may only be used for the purpose intended by the manufacturer.
Unpermitted modifications and the use of spare parts and additional equipment that
has not be bought from or recommended by the equipment manufacturer can lead to
fire, electric shock and injury.
 Keep these operating instructions in an accessible location and give these to every
operator!

WARNING
This product is covered under marketing classification IEC 61800-3. In a domestic
environment, this product can cause high frequency interference, which may require the
user to take appropriate measures.
An appropriate measure would be the inclusion of a recommended line filter.

1.5 Approvals
1.5.1 European EMC guideline

If the NORDAC SK 500E is installed according to the recommendations in this instruction manual, it meets all
EMC directive requirements, as per the EMC product standard for motor-operated systems EN 61800-3.
(See also Section. 8.3 Electromagnetic compatibility [EMC].)

1.5.2 UL approval -File No. E171342

“Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than


5000 rms symmetrical Amperes, 120 Volts maximum (SK 5xxE-xxx-
112), 240 Volts maximum (SK 5xxE-xxx-323), or 480 Volts maximum
(SK 5xxE-xxx-340), or 500 Volts maximum (SK 5xxE-xxx-350) and
when protected by J class fuses as indicated.”

Suitable for use with mains with a maximum short circuit current of
5000A (symmetrical), 120V maximum (SK 5xxE-xxx-112), 240V maximum (SK 5xxE-xxx-323), or 480V
maximum (SK 5xxE-xxx-340), or 500V maximum (SK 5xxE-xxx-350) and with protection with a J-class fuse as
described in BU 0500 DE Section 7.5.

NORDAC SK 500E frequency inverters have a motor overload protection. Further technical details can be
found in Section 7.5.
The approval procedure (UL) for sizes 5 and 6 will be completed in the 3rd quarter of 2009.

1.5.3 C-Tick labelling – No. N 23134


Frequency inverters of the NORD product series SK 500E (except 115V devices:
SK5xxE-xxx-112-O) comply with all the relevant regulations in Australia and New Zealand.

1.5.4 RoHS-conform
The frequency inverters and optional modules of the SK 500E series frequency inverters are
designed to be RoHS compliant according to Directive 2002/95/EU.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 11


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

1.6 Type code / device design

SK 500E-250-323-A-CP
Versions: CP = “ColdPlate” or “External heat sink technology”
Radio interference filter class: O = without, A or B limit value
Mains voltage: x12 = 115V, x23 = 230V, x40 = 400V
Number of mains phases: 1 = single phase, 3 = 3-phase *
Digits before comma for power: 0 = 0.xx, 1 = 0x.x0, 2 = 0xx.0
Device nominal power (xx): 25 = 0.25kW, 37 = 0.37kW, ... 75 = 7.5kW
Device series: SK 500E / SK 505E / SK 510E / SK 511E / SK 515E /
SK 520E / SK 530E / SK 535E

*) designation 3 also includes combined devices which are intended for


single and three-phase operation (please refer to the technical data)

optionale
Wall mount bracket Technologiebox
including securing screw

Additional terminals
Analogue and digital
only SK 520/53xE
control terminals

Encoder input
only SK 52x/53xE

Optional EMC Kit


Screening angle and clips
including fastening screws

12 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


2 Assembly and installation

2 Assembly and installation

2.1 Installation
NORDAC SK 500E frequency inverters are available in various sizes depending on the output. Attention must
be paid to a suitable position when installing.
The equipment requires sufficient ventilation to protect against overheating. For this the minimum guideline
distances from adjacent components above and below the frequency inverter, which could obstruct the air flow
apply. (above > 100 mm, below > 100 mm)

Distance from device: Mounting can be immediately next to each other. However, for the use of brake
resistances mounted below the device (not possible with …-CP devices), the greater width (Section 2.5) must
be taken into consideration, particularly in combination with temperature switches on the brake resistor!
Installation position The installation position is normally vertical. It must be ensured that the cooling ribs on
the rear of the device are covered with a flat surface to provide good convection.

 100mm

 100mm

Warm air must be vented above the device!

If several inverters are arranged above each other, ensure that the upper air entry temperature limit is not
exceeded. (see also Section 7, Technical Details). If this is the case, it is recommended that an "obstacle" (e.g.
a cable duct) is mounted between the inverters so that the direct air flow (rising warm air) is impeded.
Heat dissipation: If the device is installed in a control cabinet, adequate ventilation must be ensured. The
heat dissipation in operation is approx. 5% (according to the size and equipment of the device) of the rated
power of the frequency inverter.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 13


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

2.2 Dimensions
2.2.1 SK 500E, standard version

Housing dimensions Wall-mounting (Sect. 2.3.1) Weight


Size

Device type approx.


[kg]
A B C D E 

SK 5xxE-250- …
BG1 186 74 * 153 220 / 5.5 1.4
SK 5xxE-750- …
SK 5xxE-111- …
BG2 226 74 * 153 260 / 5.5 1.8
SK 5xxE-221- …
SK 5xxE-301- …
BG3 241 98 181 275 / 5.5 2.7
SK 5xxE-401- …
SK 5xxE-551- 340…
BG4 286 98 181 320 / 5.5 3.1
SK 5xxE-751- 340…
SK 5xxE-551- 323…
BG5 324 157 224 358 93 5.5 8.0
SK 5xxE-751- 323…
SK 5xxE-112- 340…
BG5 324 157 224 358 93 5.5 8.0
SK 5xxE-152- 340…

SK 5xxE-112- 323… BG6 364 183 234 398 110 5.5 10.3

SK 5xxE-182- 340…
BG6 364 183 234 398 110 5.5 10.3
SK 5xxE-222- 340…
All dimensions in [mm]
*) for the use of brake resistors mounted below
the device = 88 mm (Section 2.6)

B
C

14 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


2 Assembly and installation

2.2.2 SK 500E…-CP in ColdPlate version

Weight
Housing dimensions Wall mounting

Size
Device type approx.
[kg]
A B C D 

SK 5xxE-250- …-CP
BG1 182 95 119 1.3
SK 5xxE-750- …-CP
SK 5xxE-111- …-CP
BG2 222 95 119 1.6
SK 5xxE-221- …-CP Mounting details
SK 5xxE-301- …-CP in Section 2.3.2
BG3 237 120 119 1.9
SK 5xxE-401- …-CP
SK 5xxE-551- 340…-CP
BG4 282 120 119 2.3
SK 5xxE-751- 340…-CP
All dimensions in [mm]
Brake resistors cannot be directly mounted below
–CP devices (Section 2.6)

B C

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 15


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

2.3 Mounting dimensions


2.3.1 SK 500E, standard version

For wall mounting of the SK 500E, two (or four, for size 5 and above) appropriate brackets are supplied. These
are inserted into the cooling element at the rear of the device as shown in the illustration. For this, no further
accessories are needed.
Alternatively, the wall mounting brackets can be inserted at the side of the cooling element in order to minimise
the necessary depth of the control cabinet.
In general, care must be taken that the rear of the cooling element is covered with a flat surface and that the
device is mounted vertically. This enables optimum convection, which ensures fault-free operation.

E
Section
2.2.1

D
Section
2.2.1
A

16 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


2 Assembly and installation

2.3.2 SK 500E…-CP in ColdPlate version

According to the size of the frequency inverter, the dimensions for the drilling pattern listed below must be
observed.

Depth of the
Size Height H h1 h2 Width W k u
Cold Plate
S1 182 91 -
95
S2 222 111 -
5.5 10
S3 237 75.33 75.33
120
S4 282 90.33 90.33
All dimensions in [mm]

Sizes 3 + 4

B
Sizes 1 + 2
k
u
B
k
u

Ø 4,5mm

H h1
H
Ø 4,5mm

h1
h2

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 17


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

2.4 External heat sink kit


The SK 500E series with ColdPlate technology (SK 5xxE-…-CP) can be
extended with the external heat sink kit.
In this construction, the heat sink is outside of the control cabinet and
therefore does not need a “suitable cooling surface”. The device is cooled by
the external air.

This results in the following operating modes:

Option type Size Power [kW] Operating mode


SK TH1-1
S1 0.25 – 0.75 S1
Mat. Nr. 275999050
SK TH1-2
S2 1.1 – 1.5 S1
Mat. Nr. 275999060

The external heat sink kit contains the following:


 Heat sink
 Gasket
 Heat-conducting paste
 4 screws

Please only use the parts supplied, in order to ensure safe


operation.

18 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


2 Assembly and installation

2.4.1 Mounting the external heat sink kit:


Before installing the device, please make certain that the walls of the control cabinet can bear the load.
An opening in the wall of the control cabinet, with the dimensions of the supplied heat sink is necessary for the
installation.
1. The heat-conducting paste must be applied to the SK 5xxE ColdPlate version.
2. The heat sink must be mounted on the frequency inverter using the screws supplied.

3. The screws must be tightened and any excess heat-conducting paste must be removed.
4. Place the seal between the frequency inverter and the wall of the control cabinet.
5. The assembled device is inserted through the opening in the wall of the control cabinet.
6. Fix the frequency inverter to the wall of the control cabinet with all of the screws.
(Drilling template, see Section 2.3.2)

If correctly installed, the device is now ready for use.

NOTE: If correctly installed, protection (from outside) of max. IP54 exists.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 19


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

2.4.2 Dimensions of external heat sink

Cold-Plate
Heat sink dimensions Weight

Size
Device type dimensions
approx.
HK BK TK H B T [kg]

SK 5xxE-250- …
SK 5xxE-750- … S1 157 70 100 182 95 119 2.3
SK TH1-1
SK 5xxE-111- …
SK 5xxE-221- … S2 200 70 110 222 95 119 3.4
SK TH1-2
All dimensions in [mm]

B
BK T

TK

HK H

20 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


2 Assembly and installation

2.5 EMC- Kit


For optimum EMC-compliant wiring, the optional EMC Kit must be used. This includes a screening angle, two
hammer clips and two fixing screws.
The EMC Kit provides the possibility of attaching the screening of the motor cable to a large surface of the
frequency inverter (interference source). If necessary a screened brake resistor cable can be attached with the
two hammer clips.
The screening angle is attached to the two housing screws on the lower edge (below the U-V-W terminals).
The motor cable screening is earthed to a large area of the screening angle by means of the hammer clip.

Device type Size EMC- Kit

SK 5xxE-250- … SK 5xxE-750- S1 SK EMC 2-1


SK 5xxE-111- … SK 5xxE-221- S2 Mat. Nr. 275999011

SK 5xxE-301- … SK 5xxE-401- S3 SK EMC 2-2


SK 5xxE-551-340- … SK 5xxE-751- 340- S4 Mat. Nr. 275999021

SK 5xxE-551-323- … SK 5xxE-751- 323- SK EMC 2-3


S5
SK 5xxE-112-340- … SK 5xxE-152- 340- Mat. Nr. 275999031

SK 5xxE-112-323- SK EMC 2-4


S6
SK 5xxE-182-340- … SK 5xxE-222- 340- Mat. Nr. 275999041

Notes: The EMC Kit cannot be combined with ...-CP (ColdPlate) devices. Any cable screening must be
earthed to a large area of the mounting surface.
If mounted on the top surface of the frequency inverter (mains connection side), the EMC Kit can
also be used as a strain relief, for example to avoid contact problems with CANbus connections.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 21


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

2.6 Brake resistor (BR)


During dynamic braking (frequency reduction) of a three phase motor, electrical energy is returned to the
frequency inverter. In order to avoid an overvoltage switch-off of the frequency inverter, an external brake
resistor can be used. With this, the integrated brake chopper (electronic switch) pulses the intermediate circuit
voltage (switching wave approx. 420V/775V(/825V) DC, according to the mains voltage(115V,
230V/400V(/500V)) to the brake resistor. Here the excess energy is converted into heat.

CAUTION
The braking resistance and all other metal components can heat up to temperatures
above 70°C.
When mounting, sufficient distance from neighbouring components must be
maintained. When working on the components, allow sufficient cooling time beforehand

For inverter powers up to 2.2kW a standard bottom-mounted resistor (SK BR4-…IP40) can be used. This can
additionally be equipped with an optional temperature switch (bi-metal, switching point 180°C), in order to
indicate an overload. The fixing material in the side groove is enclosed. The resistor and the temperature
switch are connected by means of flexible stranded conductors. Approval: UL, cUL
Note: Brake resistors cannot be directly mounted below –CP (ColdPlate) devices.

SK BR4-... Size 1 SK BR4-... Size 2

Chassis resistors (SK BR2-…, IP20) are available for frequency inverters from 3kW to 22kW. These must be
mounted in the control cabinet, close to the frequency inverter. There is a temperature switch on the braking
resistor to provide protection against overload. Connection of the resistor and the temperature switch is by
means of screw terminals. Approval: UL, cUL

SK BR2-... Size 3 SK BR2-... Size 4 … 6

22 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


2 Assembly and installation

2.6.1 Electrical data BR


Energy Connecting
Continuous
Inverter type Resistor type Resistance consumptio cable /
rating
n terminals
SK 5xxE-250-112-O … SK BR4-240/100 2 x 1.9mm2
240  100 W 1.0 kWs
SK 5xxE-370-112-O Mat. Nr. 275991110
AWG 14/19
SK 5xxE-550-112-O … SK BR4-150/100
150  100 W 1.0 kWs L = 0.5m
SK 5xxE-750-112-O Mat. Nr. 275991115

SK 5xxE-250-323-A … SK BR4-240/100
240  100 W 1.0 kWs
SK 5xxE-370-323-A Mat. Nr. 275991110
2 x 1.9mm2
SK 5xxE-550-323-A … SK BR4-150/100
150  100 W 1.0 kWs AWG 14/19
SK 5xxE-750-323-A Mat. Nr. 275991115
L = 0.5m
SK 5xxE-111-323-A … SK BR4- 75/200
75  200 W 4.0 kWs
SK 5xxE-221-323-A Mat. Nr. 275991120

SK 5xxE-301-323-A … SK BR2- 35/400-C


35  400 W 6.0 kWs 2 x 10mm2
SK 5xxE-401-323-A Mat. Nr. 278282045

SK 5xxE-551-323-A … in preparation
2 x 10mm2
SK 5xxE-751-323-A
in preparation
SK 5xxE-112-323-A 2 x 10mm2

SK 5xxE-550-340-A … SK BR4-400/100 2 x 1.9mm2


400  100 W 0.75 kWs
SK 5xxE-750-340-A Mat. Nr. 275991210
AWG 14/19
SK 5xxE-111-340-A … SK BR4-220/200
220  200 W 4.0 kWs L = 0.5m
SK 5xxE-221-340-A Mat. Nr. 275991220

SK 5xxE-301-340-A … SK BR2-100/400-C
100  400 W 6.0 kWs
SK 5xxE-401-340-A Mat. Nr. 278282040
2 x 10mm2
SK 5xxE-551-340-A … SK BR2- 60/600-C
60  600 W 7.5 kWs
SK 5xxE-751-340-A Mat. Nr. 278282060

SK 5xxE-112-340-A … SK BR2- 30/1500-C


30  1500 W 20 kWs 2 x 10mm2
SK 5xxE-152-340-A Mat. Nr. 278282150

SK 5xxE-182-340-A … SK BR2- 22/2200-C


22  2200 W 28 kWs 2 x 10mm2
SK 5xxE-222-340-A Mat. Nr. 278282220

*) Maximum once within 120s

Bi-metal temperature switch


Protection Connecting cable/
Voltage Current Dimensions
class terminals
Flexible strand,
2,5A at cos=1 Width +10mm 2 x 0.8mm2
SK BR4-... IP40 250Vac
1,6A at cos=0.6 (one side) AWG 18
L = 0.5m
250Vac 10A
Terminals
SK BR2-... IP00 125Vac 15A internal
2 x 4mm2
30Vdc 5A

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 23


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

2.6.2 Dimensions bottom-mounted BR


Fixing dimensions
Resistor type Size A B C
D 
SK BR4-240/100
SK BR4-150/100 S1 230 88 175 220 5.5
SK BR4-400/100
SK BR4- 75/200
S2 270 88 175 260 5.5
SK BR4-220/200
C = instalment depth of the frequency inverter + bottom-mounted BR all measurements in mm

B C

B C

NORDAC SK 5xxE
NORDAC SK 5xxE

A D
A D

SK BR4-... Size 1 SK BR4-... Size 2


Optional temperature switch

2.6.3 Dimensions Chassis BR


Fixing dimensions
Resistor type A B C
D E 
SK BR2-100/400-C
170 100 240 150 90 4.3
SK BR2- 35/400-C
SK BR2- 60/600-C 350 92 120 325 78 6.5
SK BR2- 30/1500-C 560 185 120 530 150 6.5
SK BR2- 22/2200-C 460 270 120 430 240 6.5

All measurements in mm

SK BR2-... Size 3 … 6
E D
(schematic diagram, the design
B varies according to power)
A

24 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


2 Assembly and installation

2.7 Line choke (accessory)


To reduce input side current harmonics, additional 1 2 3 4 5 6

inductivity can be installed into the line supply to the


inverter.
These chokes are specified for a maximum supply
voltage of 230V or 480V at 50/60 Hz. T
The protection class of the chokes is IP00 and they
must therefore be installed in a control cabinet.
For frequency inverters with an output of 45 kW or
more, a line choke is recommended where several
devices are being used, in order to avoid possible
adverse effects of one device on another. In L2 B2
addition, the charging currents (mains voltage
fluctuations) are significantly reduced. L1 B1

Input choke 1 x 220 - 240 V Detail: mounting

Connections
Inverter type

Mounting
NORDAC Continuous L1 B1 T
Type Inductance L2 B2
SK 500E current

0.25 ... 0.75 kW SK CI1-230/8-C 8A 2 x 1.0 mH 78 65 89 56 40 M4 4


Mat. No.: 278999030

1.1 ... 2.2 kW SK CI1-230/20-C 20 A 2 x 0.4 mH 96 90 106 84 65 M6 10


Mat. No.: 278999040

All dimensions in [mm] [mm2]

Input choke 3 x 200 - 240 V Detail: mounting

Connections
Inverter type
Mounting

NORDAC Continuous L1 B1 T
Type Inductance L2 B2
SK 500E current

0.25 ... 0.75 kW SK CI1-460/6-C 6A 3 x 4.88 mH 125 95 140 100 55 M5 4


Mat. - Nr.: 276995004

1.1 ... 1.5 kW SK CI1-460/11-C 11 A 3 x 2.93 mH 155 95 160 130 56.5 M8 4


Mat. - Nr.: 276995010

2.2 … 3.0 kW SK CI1-460/20-C 20 A 3 x 1.47 mH 185 102 201 170 57.5 M6 10


Mat. - Nr.: 276995020

4.0 … 7.5 kW SK CI1-460/40-C 40 A 3 x 0.73 mH 190 122 201 170 77.5 M6 10


Mat. - Nr.: 276995040

11.0. kW SK CI1-460/70-C 70 A 3 x 0.47 mH 230 125 260 180 98 M6 35


Mat. - Nr.: 276995070

All dimensions in [mm] [mm2]

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 25


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Input choke 3 x 380 - 480 V Detail: mounting

Connections
Inverter type

Mounting
NORDAC Continuous L1 B1 T
Type Inductance L2 B2
SK 500E current

0.75 ... 2.2 kW SK CI1-460/6-C 6A 3 x 4.88 mH 125 95 140 100 55 M5 4


Mat. - Nr.: 276995004

3.0 ... 4.0 kW SK CI1-460/11-C 11 A 3 x 2.93 mH 155 95 160 130 56.5 M8 4


Mat. - Nr.: 276995010

5.5 ... 7.5 kW SK CI1-460/20-C 20 A 3 x 1.47 mH 185 102 201 170 57.5 M6 10
Mat. - Nr.: 276995020

11 ... 15 kW SK CI1-460/40-C 40 A 3 x 0.73 mH 190 122 201 170 77.5 M6 10


Mat. - Nr.: 276995040

18.5 ... 22 kW SK CI1-460/70-C 70 A 3 x 0.47 mH 230 125 260 180 98 M6 35


Mat. - Nr.: 276995070

All dimensions in [mm] [mm2]

26 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


2 Assembly and installation

2.8 Output choke (accessories)


To reduce interference signals from the motor cable or to
compensate for cable capacitance in long motor 1 2 3 4 5 6

cables, an additional output choke can be installed


into the inverter output.
Take care during installation that the pulse frequency
of the frequency inverter is set to 3-6 kHz
(P504 = 3-6).
T
These chokes are specified for a maximum supply
voltage of 480V at 0-100 Hz.
An output choke should be fitted for cable lengths
over 100m/30m (unshielded/shielded). Further
details can be found in Section 2.10.4 "Motor cable". L2 B2
The protection class of the chokes is IP00 and they
must therefore be installed in a control cabinet. L1 B1

Output choke 3 x200 – 240V Detail: mounting

Connections
Inverter type

Mounting
NORDAC Continuous L1 B1 T
Type Inductance L2 B2
SK 500E current

0.25 …0.75 kW SK CO1-460/4-C 4A 3 x 3.5 mH 120 104 140 84 75 M6 4


Mat. - Nr.: 276996004

1.1 ... 1.5 kW SK CO1-460/9-C 9A 3 x 2.5 mH 155 110 160 130 71.5 M6 4
Mat. - Nr.: 276996009

2.2 ... 3.0 kW SK CO1-460/17-C 17 A 3 x 1.2 mH 185 102 201 170 57.5 M6 10
Mat. - Nr.: 276996017

4 ... 7.5 kW SK CO1-460/33-C 33 A 3 x 0.6 mH 185 122 201 170 77.5 M6 10


Mat. - Nr.: 276996033

11kW SK CO1-460/60-C 60 A 3 x 0.33 mH 230 125 260 176 71 M6 35


Mat. - Nr.: 276996060

All dimensions in [mm] [mm2]

Output choke 3 x 380 - 460V Detail: mounting


Connections

Inverter type
Mounting

NORDAC Continuous L1 B1 T
Type Inductance L2 B2
SK 500E current

0.55 ... 4.0 kW SK CO1-460/9-C 9A 3 x 2.5 mH 155 110 160 130 71.5 M6 4
Mat. - Nr.: 276996009

5.5 ... 7.5 kW SK CO1-460/17-C 17 A 3 x 1.2 mH 185 102 201 170 57.5 M6 10
Mat. - Nr.: 276996017

11 ... 15 kW SK CO1-460/33-C 33 A 3 x 0.6 mH 185 122 201 170 77.5 M6 10


Mat. - Nr.: 276996033

18.5 ... 22 kW SK CO1-460/60-C 60 A 3 x 0.33 mH 230 125 260 176 71 M6 35


Mat. - Nr.: 276996060

All dimensions in [mm] [mm2]

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 27


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

2.9 Wiring guidelines


The frequency inverter has been developed for use in an industrial environment. In this environment, high
levels of electromagnetic interference can influence the frequency inverter. In general, correct installation
ensures safe and problem-free operation. To meet the limit values of the EMC directives, the following
instructions should be complied with.
(1) Ensure that all equipment in the control cabinet is securely earthed using short earthing cables that have
large cross-sections and which are connected to a common earthing point or earthing bar. It is especially
important that every control device connected to the frequency inverters (e.g. an automation device) is
connected, using a short cable with large cross-section, to the same earthing point as the inverter itself.
Flat conductors (e.g. metal clamps are preferable, as they have a lower impedance at high frequencies.
(2) The bonding cable of the motor controlled by the frequency inverter should be connected directly to the
earthing terminal of the associated frequency inverter. The presence of a central earthing bar in the
control cabinet and the grouping together of all bonding conductors to this bar normally ensures safe
operation. (See also Section. 8.3/8.4 EMC)
(3) Where possible, screened cables should be used for control loops. The shielding at the cable end should
be carefully sealed and it must be ensured that the wires are not laid over longer distances without
shielding.
The shields of analog setpoint cables should only be earthed on one side on the frequency inverter.
(4) The control cables should be installed as far as possible from power cables, using separate cable ducts
etc. Where cables cross, an angle of 90° should be ensured as far as possible.
(5) Ensure that the contactors in the cabinet are interference protected, either by RC circuits in the case of
AC contactors or by free-wheeling diodes for DC contactors, for which the interference traps must be
positioned on the contactor coils. Varistors for over-voltage limitation are also effective. This
interference suppression is particularly important when the contactors are controlled by the relay in the
frequency inverter.
(6) Use screened or armoured cable for the load connections (motor cable) and earth the screening/armour
at both ends. If possible, earthing should be made directly to the electrically conducting mounting plate of
the control cabinet or the screening angle of the EMC Kit (Section 2.4).
In addition, an EMC-compliant cabling must be ensured. (see also Section 8.3/8.4 EMC). If required, an
optional output choke can be supplied.

The safety regulations must be complied with under all circumstances when installing the
frequency inverter!

NOTE
The control cables, line cables and motor cables must be laid separately. In no case should they
be laid in the same protective pipes/installation ducts.
The test equipment for high voltage insulations must not be used on cables that are connected to
the frequency inverter.

28 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


2 Assembly and installation

2.10 Electrical connection

WARNING THESE DEVICES MUST BE EARTHED.


Safe operation of the devices presupposes that qualified personnel mount and operate it in
compliance with the instructions provided in these operating instructions.
In particular, the general and regional mounting and safety regulations for work on high voltage
systems (e.g. VDE) must be complied with as must the regulations concerning professional use of
tools and the use of personal protection equipment.
Dangerous voltages can be present at the motor connection terminals even when the inverter is
switched off. Always use insulated screwdrivers on these terminal fields.
Ensure that the input voltage source is not live before setting up or changing connections to the
unit.
Make sure that the inverter and motor have the correct supply voltage set.

2.11 Electrical connection of power unit

L1 / L
The terminals of the mains connection and the multi-function relay L2 / N
L3 / -
(X3) are located on the top of the frequency inverter. PE
The motor and brake resistor connections are located on the base 24V DC
of the unit.
X1 - PE L3 L2 L1 X12 - 40 44
The control terminals can be accessed from the front of the
X3 - 4 3 2 1
frequency inverter. For this the terminal cover (below the TU insert)
must be pushed downwards, and can then be removed. The
connecting terminals are then easily accessible.

Before connecting the device,


the following must be observed:
1. Ensure that the voltage source provides the correct voltage and
is suitable for the current required (see Section. 7 Technical
data).
2. Ensure that suitable circuit breakers with the specified nominal
current range are installed between the voltage source and the
inverter.
3. Connect the line voltage directly to the line terminals L1-L2/N-L3
and the earth (according to the device).
X13 - T1 T2 X8 - 86 87 89 88
4. A four-core cable must be used to connect the motor. The cable
X2 - PE U V W +B -B -DC
is connected to the motor terminals U - V - W and the earth.
External
5. If screened motor cables (recommended) are used, the cable Braking
resistor
screening must also be connected to a large area of the
metallic screening angle of the EMC Kit (Section 2.5), however,
at least to the electrically conducting mounting surface of the X12, X13: size 5 and above
control cabinet. M X8: optional,
3~ for sizes 1-4:
the position of the terminal
block differs
(See Point 2.12.1)

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 29


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

NOTE: When using specific wiring sleeves, the maximum connection cross-section can be reduced.
To connect the power unit, the following screwdrivers must be used:
Size Screwdriver
Frequency Inverter Type Size
Size 1 - 4 Cross-head Pozidrive/Supadrive size: 1
S5 Slot-head 0.6 x 3.5
S6 Slot-head 1.0 x 6.5

NOTE: If synchronising devices or several motors are connected in parallel, the frequency inverter must
be switched over to linear voltage/frequency characteristic curves,  P211 = 0 and P212 = 0.

NOTE: The use of shielded cables is essential in order to maintain the specified radio interference
suppression level. (See also Chapter 8.4 EMC limit value classes)

ATTENTION

This device produces high frequency interference, which may make additional suppression
measures necessary in domestic environments. (Details in Section 8.3/8.4)

30 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


2 Assembly and installation

2.11.1 Mains supply (X1-PE, L1, L2/N, L3)


No special safety measures are required on the mains input
side of the frequency inverter. It is advisable to use the normal
mains fuses (see technical data) and a main switch or circuit
breaker.
115V devices of 0.25kW to 0.75kW may only be used with a
110…120V (L/N = L1/L2) single phase supply.
230V devices of 0.25kW to 2.2kW may optionally be operated
with single phase 230V (L/N = L1/L2) or three phase (L1/L2/L3)
supplies, however, not with three-phase 400V!
All 400V devices and devices  3kW may only be operated with a three-phase supply (L1/L2/L3). For the exact
specification, please refer to the technical data in Section 7.

Note: The use of this frequency inverter on an IT network is possible after modifications by means of
jumpers. Further details in Section 2.11.9 - 2.11.10.

Connection data:
Frequency Inverter Size Size Size
1 ... 4 5 6
Rigid cable cross-section 0.2 … 6mm² 0.5 … 16mm² 0.5 … 35mm²
Flexible cable cross-section 0.2 … 4mm² 0.5 … 10mm² 0.5 … 25mm²
AWG standard AWG 24-10 AWG 20-6 AWG 20-2
Tightening torque 0.5 … 0.6Nm 1.2 … 1.5Nm 2.5 … 4.5Nm
for screw terminals

2.11.2 Multi-function relay (X3 – 1, 2, 3, 4)


The functions of this relay can be set as required using the
parameters P434 to P443. The contacts may only be operated
with a maximum of 230V AC / 24V DC, 2A.
In the default setting, the terminals 1-2 (output 1, P434) can
control a mechanical motor brake. This is then released or
applied at the correct time. To optimise the process, the
appropriate delay times (0.2 – 0.3 sec) should be set in the
parameters P107/P114.
In the default setting, the closed contact on terminals 3-4
(output 2, P441) reports the readiness of the frequency inverter. If there is an error message or the frequency
inverter is without voltage, this contact is open.

Connection data:
Frequency Inverter Size Size
1 ... 4 5…6
Rigid cable cross-section 0.14 … 2.5mm² 0.2…6mm²
Flexible cable cross-section 0.14 … 1.5mm² 0.2…4mm²
AWG standard AWG 26-14 AWG 24-10
Tightening torque 0.5…0.6Nm 0.5…0.6Nm
for screw terminals

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 31


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

2.11.3 Motor cable (X2 - U, V, W, earth)


The motor cable may have a total length of 100m if this is
a standard cable. If a screened motor cable is used, or if the
cable is laid in a metal conduit which is well earthed, the
total length should not exceed 30m.
For greater lengths of cable, an additional output choke
(accessory) must be used.

Note: Please also observe Section 8.4 EMC limit


value classes.

Note: For multiple motor use the total cable length consists of the sum of the individual cable lengths.

Connection data:
Frequency Inverter Size Size Size
1 ... 4 5 6
Rigid cable cross-section 0.2 … 6mm² 0.5 … 16mm² 0.5 … 35mm²
Flexible cable cross-section 0.2 … 4mm² 0.5 … 10mm² 0.5 … 25mm²
AWG standard AWG 24-10 AWG 20-6 AWG 20-2
Tightening torque 0.5 … 0.6Nm 1.2 … 1.5Nm 2.5 … 4.5Nm
for screw terminals

2.11.4 Braking resistor connection (X2 - +B, -B)


The terminals +B/ -B are intended for the connection of a
suitable braking resistor. A short screened connection should
be selected.

Note: The great production of heat in the braking


resistor must be taken into account.

Note: For devices with 115V mains voltage, no DC


terminal is provided.

Attention: The terminals +B, -DC are suitable for the DC-coupling of several frequency inverters. Never
connect a braking resistor to DC! For further details of DC-coupling, please refer to Section 2.11.8.

Connection data:
Frequency Inverter Size Size Size
1 ... 4 5 6
Rigid cable cross-section 0.2 … 6mm² 0.5 … 16mm² 0.5 … 35mm²
Flexible cable cross-section 0.2 … 4mm² 0.5 … 10mm² 0.5 … 25mm²
AWG standard AWG 24-10 AWG 20-6 AWG 20-2
Tightening torque 0.5 … 0.6Nm 1.2 … 1.5Nm 2.5 … 4.5Nm
for screw terminals

32 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


2 Assembly and installation

2.11.5 Motor – PTC connection (X13 – T1, T2) (size 5 and above)
(As per EN 60947-8)
For size 5 and 6 devices, the connection of the
motor thermistor is made via terminals T1 and T2.
For smaller sizes of inverter (S 1—4) the thermistor
must be connected to digital input 5 (DIN5) on plug
block X5 (See section 2.12 “Electrical connection of
the control unit”).

Anschlussdaten:
Frequency Inverter Size
5…6
Rigid cable cross-section 0.2…6mm²
Flexible cable cross-section 0.2…4mm²
AWG standard AWG 24-10
Tightening torque 0.5…0.6Nm
for screw terminals
Nominal Ratings
Triggering value > 3.6 k
Relapse value > 1.65 k
Measuring voltage 5V to R < 4 k

2.11.6 External control voltage, 24 V supply (X12 – 44, 40) (Size 5 and above)
Size 5 and 6 frequency inverters are equipped with
both an internal switched mains unit for the provision
of the control voltage, as well as a separate terminal
block for connection to an external low voltage
supply. Switchover between the internal and
external power supply is carried out automatically.
Incorrect connections must be avoided.
Size 1 – 4 SK5x5E devices are not equipped with an internal mains unit. This means that in order to provide
their function, these units must be connected to an external power supply via terminal block X5:44 / X5:40. For
further information, please refer to Section 2.12.

Connection data:
Frequency Inverter Size
5…6
Rigid cable cross-section 0.2…6mm²
Flexible cable cross-section 0.2…4mm²
AWG standard AWG 24-10
Tightening torque 0.5…0.6Nm
for screw terminals
Nominal Ratings
Terminal X12:44 +24 … 30V
(input) (min 1000mA)
Terminal X12:40 GND

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 33


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

2.11.7 Safe pulse block 24 V (X8 - 86, 87, 89, 88)


Series SK 51xE and SK 53xE frequency inverters are equipped with the option “Functional safety” (See
supplementary operating instruction BU 0530).
Connection of the corresponding control cables
is made via terminal block X8. Up to and
including size 4, this terminal block is located
under the front cover (See Section 2.12.1
“Terminal blocks”). From size 5 and above, the
terminal block X8 is located on the underside of the frequency inverter (motor output side).

Connection data:
Frequency Inverter Size
5…6
Rigid cable cross-section 0.2…6mm²
Flexible cable cross-section 0.2…4mm²
AWG standard AWG 24-10
Tightening torque for screw 0.5…0.6Nm
terminals
Nominal Ratings
Terminal X8:86 +24 V
(output: +24V supply) (max. 300mA)
Terminal X8:87 GND
Terminal X8:89 +24 V ± 25%
(Input: “Safe pulse block” (max. 100mA)
Terminal X8:88 GND

(As supplied, for commissioning without safety switching device, terminals 87-88 and 86-89 are bridged. In order to be able to
use the safety function, the bridges must be removed.)

(For further details, see the separate instruction BU 0530 “Functional safety”)

34 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


2 Assembly and installation

2.11.8 DC-coupling (X2 - +B, -DC)

In drive engineering, DC-coupling is advisable if motors act as drivers and generators at the same time in the
system. Here, the energy from the drive which is acting as a generator can be fed back to the drive which is
acting as a motor. The advantages are lower energy consumption and the sparing use of braking resistors.
Note: In the 115V devices (SK 5xx-xxx-112-O, no DC terminal is provided. DC-coupling is therefore not
possible.
NB: For direct current coupling of single-phase devices, care must be taken that the coupling to the
same external conductor is used.

Diagram of a DC-coupling:

L1 / L
L2 / N
L3 / -
PE

PE L3 L2 L1 PE L3 L2 L1

U1
Readiness
message from
all FIs

U2

PE U V W +B -B -DC PE U V W +B -B -DC

Coupling if
FIs ready
M M
3~ 3~

The following points must be taken into account:


(1) Use a connecting cable between the equipment (two devices), which is as short as possible. If different
sizes of frequency inverter are used, the connection in the DC circuit must be made with the maximum
cross-section of the smaller device.
(2) Each device is provided with its own mains supply.
(3) Ensure that the coupling is only made after readiness is reported. Otherwise, there is a danger that all the
frequency inverters will be charged via a single device.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 35


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

(4) Ensure that the coupling is disconnected as soon as one of the devices is no longer ready for operation.
(5) For a high availability a braking resistor (possibly lower power) must be used. If different sizes of frequency
inverters are used, the braking resistor must be connected to the larger of the two frequency inverters.
(6) If devices with the same rating (identical type) are coupled, and the same mains impedances are in effect
(identical lengths of cable to the mains rail), the frequency inverters may be operated without mains
chokes. Otherwise a mains choke must be installed in the mains cable of each frequency inverter.

2.11.9 Jumper “A” mains input


In order to make the frequency inverter SK 500E suitable for IT networks this jumper must be set to position 0.
Here it must be noted that the specified degree of radio interference suppression changes. Further details can
be found in Section 8.3. EMC.

Size 1 - 4
Top side of device
= Operation in IT network = Position 0

= irrelevant = Position 1

= normal position = Position 2

Size 5 - 6

= Operation in IT network = Position 0 Top side of device

= irrelevant = Position 1

= normal position = Position 2

36 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


2 Assembly and installation

2.11.10 Jumper “B” motor output


This jumper makes the device suitable for IT networks or reduces the leakage current of the frequency
inverter to earth. This may be necessary of several frequency inverters are operated via a single FI circuit
breaker.
Here it must be noted that the specified degree of radio interference suppression changes. Further details can
be found in Section 8.3. EMC.

Size 1 - 4

= Operation in IT network = Position 0


Underside of the device

= normal position = Position 1

= reduced leakage current – Position 2

( Th e se t pul se freq uency (P50 4) onl y has


a slig ht in flu ence on the lea ka ge curre nt.)

Size 5 - 6

= Operation in IT network = Position 0 Underside of the device

= normal position = Position 1

= irrelevant = Position 2

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 37


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

2.11.11 Internal jumper switching


As delivered, the jumpers are set in the “normal position”. With this, the mains filter has its normal effect and
leakage current.

L1

Cx
Cx
~ =
L2/N M
L3
Cx = L
~
Cy Cy Cy Cyzk Cyzk Cyzk Cyzk

Jumper A Jumper B

Size 1 - 4

L
L1

Cx
Cx
~ =
L2 M
L3
Cx = ~
VIS 24V
Actuation
Cy Cy Cy VIS 0V
Functional safety

Cyfs Cyfs

Jumper A Jumper B

Size 5 - 6

Summery of operating modes


Frequency Inverter Jumper A Jumper B Comments Leakage Current
Size 1 - 4 Position 0 Position 0 Operation in IT network Not applicable
Size 1 - 4 Position 2 Position 1 Large filtering effect <30 mA
(See Section 8.4)
Size 1 - 4 Position 2 Position 2 Limited filtering effect << 30mA
(See Section 8.4) > 3.5mA
Size 5 - 6 Position 0 Position 0 Operation in IT network Not applicable
Size 5 - 6 Position 2 Position 1 Large filtering effect <3.5 mA
(See Section 8.4) (Low leakage current,
as per EN50178)

38 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


2 Assembly and installation

2.12 Electrical connection of the control unit


The control terminals are on the front cover of the frequency inverter. The equipment differs according to the
version (SK 500E / 505E / 510E / 511E/ 515E/ 520E / 530E / 535E) and size (S 1-4 or S 5-6).

Connection terminals: Plugs, terminals and connectors can be released with a small screwdriver.

Cable cross-section: 0.14 ... 1.5mm 2, AWG 26-16, stiff or flexible

Control cable: Lay and shield separately from the mains/motor cables.

Series / Size Control Voltage Voltage max. Load / Comments


SK 5X0E / S 1-4 INTERNAL 5V ± 20% 250MA
(OUTPUT) 10V 5MA, REFERENCE VOLTAGE FOR AN
15V ± 20% EXTERNAL POTENTIOMETER
150MA TO SUPPLY THE DIGITAL INPUTS OR A
10-30V INCREMENTAL ENCODER
ANALOGUE 0…10V 5MA ANALOG OR
OUTPUT 20MA DIGITAL
DIGITAL OUTPUT 15V ± 20% 20MA
SK 5X5E / S 1-4 INTERNAL 5V ± 20% 250MA
(OUTPUT) 10V 5MA, REFERENCE VOLTAGE FOR AN
18…30V EXTERNAL POTENTIOMETER
CORRESPONDING 150MA TO SUPPLY THE DIGITAL INPUTS OR A
TO EXTERNAL 10-30V INCREMENTAL ENCODER
CONTROL
VOLTAGE
ANALOGUE 0…10V 5MA ANALOG OR
OUTPUT 20MA DIGITAL
DIGITAL OUTPUT 18…30V 20MA
CORRESPONDING
TO EXTERNAL
CONTROL
VOLTAGE
EXTERNAL 18…30V 800MA MIN. FOR THE SUPPLY OF THE
(SUPPLY) FREQUENCY INVERTER CONTROL UNIT
SK 5X5E / S 5-6 INTERNAL 5V ± 20% 250MA
(OUTPUT) 10V 5MA, REFERENCE VOLTAGE FOR AN
24V± 25% EXTERNAL POTENTIOMETER
200MA TO SUPPLY THE DIGITAL INPUTS OR A
10-30V INCREMENTAL ENCODER
ANALOGUE 0…10V 5MA ANALOG OR
OUTPUT 20MA DIGITAL
DIGITAL OUTPUT 24V ± 25% 200MA
EXTERNAL 24V…30V 1,000MA MIN. FOR THE SUPPLY OF THE
(SUPPLY) FREQUENCY INVERTER CONTROL UNIT

NOTE
GND/0V is a common reference potential for analogue and digital inputs.
5V / 15V (24V) can be collected by several terminals if required. For Sizes 1-4, the output
currents must not exceed 250mA/150mA (5V/15V) For Sizes 5 – 6 the limiting values are
250mA/200mA.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 39


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

2.12.1 Terminal blocks


Size 1 to 4 devices (S 1 – 4)

X9/X10: 2x RJ45 socket X11:1x RJ12 socket


to connect the to connect the
CAN/CANopen RS232 or RS485
interface interface

only with SK 52x/53xE


X9 X10 X11

X4: analog inputs and


X7: additional digital inputs outputs
and outputs
+10V max. 5mA
only with SK 52x/53xE 0...10V or 0/4...20mA

DIP switch: X5: digital inputs and


Switching from analog voltage supply
inputs AIN2/AIN1
current/voltage setpoint Ri DIN approx. 4.5k

I = current 0/4...20mA for SK 5x0E


V = voltage 0...10V Terminal 42 internal
+15V max. 150mA
NOTE: +5V max. 250mA
AIN2 – upper DIP Switch
AIN1 – lower DIP Switch for SK 5x5E
Terminal 44 external
+18-30V min. 800mA

X8: VI_S 24V, input of the


pulse lock
X6: Incremental encoder
VO_S 15/24V, output for input
starting up without
safety switching unit only with SK 52x/53xE
Incremental encoder, e.g.:
only with SK 51x/53xE 10-30V, TTL, RS422
further details in 2048 Imp./Rpm.
handbook BU 0530 Note: 5V encoders should
not be used.

40 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


2 Assembly and installation

Size 5 to 6 devices (S 5 – 6)

X9/X10: 2x RJ45 socket X11:1x RJ12 socket


to connect the to connect the
CAN/CANopen RS232 or RS485
interface interface

X4: analog inputs and


outputs

±10V max. 5mA


-10V … +10V oder
0...10V oder 0/4...20mA

analog output: 0…10V

X7: additional digital inputs


and outputs

only with SK 535E

Dip-Switch: left = ON / right = OFF

S4: AIN2: ON =  10 Volt


OFF = 0 … 10 Volt
S3: AIN1: ON =  10 Volt
OFF = 0 … 10 Volt
S2: AIN2: I = ON = current 0/4…20mA X6: Incremental encoder X5: digital inputs and
V = OFF = voltage input voltage supply
S1: AIN1: I = ON = current 0/4…20mA only with SK 535E
V = OFF = voltage Ri DIN ca. 4.5k
Incremental encoder, e.g.:
Note: 10-30V, TTL, RS422 Kl. 44 internal
If S2 is set to ON (AIN2 = Current input), 2048 Imp./Rpm. +24V max. 200mA
S4 must be set to OFF.
Note: 5V encoders should
If S1 is set to ON (AIN1 = Current input), not be used.
S3 must be set to OFF.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 41


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

2.12.2 Details of the SK 5x0E control connections


Terminal X5:42 (VO15V), internal 15V control voltage! Terminal 42. Here the frequency inverter provides the
control voltage.
Terminal Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
[factory setting]

Terminal block X3 (See also Chap. 2.12)


1 K1.1 Output 1
2 K1.2 Braking control P434...
[Braking control] Relay closing contact
3 K2.1 Output 2 230V AC / 24V DC, 2A
4 K2.2 Fault / Ready P441...
[Ready/Fault]

Terminal block X4
11 VO 10V 10V
10V, 5mA The analogue input controls the output
Reference voltage
frequency of the frequency inverter.
12 GND /0V Reference potential
0V analogue 11
for analogue signals
12
14 AIN1 Analog input 1 V=0...10V, Ri=30k, 14 R = 10k P400
I=0/4...20mA, Ri=250, 16
[set point frequency] 17
can be switched over
16 AIN2 Analog input 2 with DIP switch,
reference voltage GND. The possible digital functions are
[no function] described in the parameters P405...
For the use of digital P420...P425.
functions 7.5...30V.
17 AOUT1 Analogue output 0...10V Can be used for an external display or
Reference potential GND for further processing in a following
[no function] machine.
max. load current: P418/419
5mA analogue, Datails of analogue/digital can be
20mA digital found in Parameter P418

42 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


2 Assembly and installation

Terminal Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter


[factory setting]

Terminal block X5 For SK 5x0E, internal 15V supply


21 DIN1 digital input 1 Each digital input has a reaction time
of 1 – 2ms.
[ON right]
P420

Connection with internal 15V:

22 DIN2 digital input 2 21


22
[ON left] 23
24 P421
25
42 15V
7.5...30V, Ri=6.1k 40
23 DIN3 digital input 3 41
motor - PTC
[parameter set bit0]
P422

Connection with external 7,5-30V:

24 DIN4 digital input 4 21


22
[fixed frequency 1, 23
P429] 24 P423
25
7.5...30V
42
40 GND/0V
41
25 DIN5 digital input 5
motor - PTC
2.5...30V, Ri=2.2k,
[no function] only this input is
P424
suitable for evaluation of
the thermistor with 5V NOTE: For the motor thermistor
(DIN5) P424 = 13 must be set.
42 VO 15V 15V supply voltage Supply voltage provided by the
freequency inverter for connection to
15V  20%
the digital inputs or the supply of a 10-
30V encoder.
40 GND /0V Reference potential
0V digital Reference potential
for digital signals
41 VO 5V 5V supply voltage 5V  20% Voltage supply for motor-PTC

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 43


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Terminal Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter


[factory setting]

Terminal block X6 (only SK 520/530E)


40 GND /0V Reference potential
0V digital
for digital signals The incremental encoder input can be
51 ENCA+ Track A used for the exact regualtion of speed
of rotation, additional set point
functions or positioning.
52 ENCA- Track A inverse An encoder system with 10-30V supply
voltage must be used in order to
TTL, RS422 P300
compensate for voltage drop in long
53 ENCB+ Track B 500…8192Imp./Rpm. cable connections. …P327

Note: Encoders with 5V supply are not


suitable in order to set up a system
54 ENCB- Track B inverse which operates reliably.

Terminal block X7 (only SK 520/530E))


73 RS485 + BUS connection parallel to RS485 on
Baudrate
RJ12 plug
9600…38400Baud P502
Data cable RS485 NOTE: The terminal resistance of DIP
74 RS485 - Terminal resistance …P513
switch 1 (see RJ12/RJ45) can also be
R=120
used for Kl. 73/74.
26 DIN6 digital input 6
As described for terminal block X5, P425
[no function] DIN1 to DIN5.
7.5...30V, Ri=3.3k
27 DIN7 digital input 7 Not suitable for the evaluation of a
motor thermistor. P470
[no function]
5 DOUT1 Output 3 P450
digital output
[no function] For evaluation in a control system. The …P452
15V, max. 20mA scope of functions corresponds to the
7 DOUT2 Output 4 relay (P434/441). P455
max. 100k load
[no function] …P457

42 VO 15V 15V supply voltage Voltage supply for connection to the


15V  20% digital inputs or the supply of a 10-30V
encoder
40 GND /0V Reference potential
for digital signals 0V digital Reference potential

Terminal block X8 (only SK 510/511/530E)


86 VO_S 15V Supply voltage When setting-up without using a safety
15V  20%
87 VO_S 0V Reference potential function, wire directly to V_IS 24V.
P420
88 VI_S 0V Reference potential …P426,
24V  25%, 100mA P470
89 VI_S 24V Input Fail-safe input
Refer to technical data!
safe pulse block

44 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


2 Assembly and installation

Terminal Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter


[factory setting]
Plug block X11 (1x RJ12), RS485/RS232
Note: Coupling of two frequency inverters via the RJ12 socket must only be made via the USS BUS (RS485). Care must be taken
that no connection to the data cable is possible via RS232, in order to prevent damage to this interface.

1 RS485 A Baudrate
9600…38400Baud
Data cable RS485
2 RS485 B Terminal resistance
R=120 DIP 1 (see below)
3 GND Reference potential
0V digital P502...P513
for Bus signals
4 232 TXD Baudrate

RS485_A
RS485_B
Data cable RS232
9600…38400Baud

GN D

+ 5V
RXD
5 232 RXD

TXD
6 +5V internal 5V supply
5V  20% RJ12: Pin No. 1 … 6
voltage
optional Adapter cable Length 3m
RJ12 to SUB-D9 n.c.
Assignments of the n.c.
... for direct SUB-D9 plug socket: GND
TxD
connection to a PC RXD RxT
+ 5V
with NORD CON 0V TXD

Mat. No. 278910240


5 1
9 6

5V

DIP switches 1/2 (top side of SK 5x0E)


Plug designation X11 X10 X9
DIP switch 1
Terminal resistor for RS485 interface
(RJ12); ON = switched in

DIP switch 2
CAN _SHLD

CAN _SHLD
CAN _GN D

CAN _GN D

CAN _GN D

CAN _GN D
1 2
CAN _24V

CAN _24V
RS485_A
RS485_B

CAN _H

CAN _H
CAN _L

CAN _L
Terminal resistor for CAN/CANopen ON
GN D

+ 5V
RXD
TXD

nc
nc

nc
nc
interface (RJ12); ON = switched in
RS232/485 DIP CAN /CANopen
Plug block X9 and X10 (2x RJ45), CAN/CANopen (only 511E/520E/530E)
1 CAN_H
CAN/CANopen Baudrate …500kBaud
2 CAN_L signal
RJ45 sockets are
connected in parallel
3 CAN_GND CAN GND internally.
Terminal resistance
4 nc R=120 DIP 2
CAN _SHLD

CAN _SHLD
CAN _GN D

CAN _GN D

CAN _GN D

CAN _GN D
CAN _24V

CAN _24V

(see below)
CAN _H

CAN _H
CAN _L

CAN _L

No function NOTE: To operate


nc
nc

nc
nc

5 nc P502...P515
CANbus/CANopen the
interface must be 2x RJ45: Pin No. 1 … 8
6 CAN_SHD Cable shield externally supplied with NOTE: For SK 53xE frequency
24V (capacity 30mA). inverters this CANopen interface can
NOTE: Further details be used for the evaluation of an
7 CAN_GND GND/0V absolute value encoder. Further details
about the connection
can be found in Chapter can be found in Manual BU 0510.
8 CAN_24V External 24V DC 2.11 RJ45 WAGO
supply voltage connection module. Recommendation: Provide strain
relief (e.g. with EMC Kit)

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 45


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

2.12.3 Details of the SK 5x5E control connections


Size 1 - 4:
Terminal X5:44 (VI24V): Control voltage 24V external! The frequency inverter must be provided with an
external 24V supply.

Size 5 – 6:
Terminal X5:44 (VO24V): Control voltage 24V internal! Here, the frequency inverter provides the power supply,
which can either be supplied from the internal low voltage generator or optionally via the terminals
X12:44/X12:40.

Terminal Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter


[factory setting]

Terminal block X3 (See also Chap. 2.12)


1 K1.1 Output 1
2 K1.2 Braking control P434...
[Braking control] Relay closing contact
3 K2.1 Output 2 230V AC / 24V DC, 2A
4 K2.2 Fault / Ready P441...
[Ready/Fault]

Terminal block X4
11 VO 10V 10V
10V, 5mA
Reference voltage
12 GND /0V Reference potential The analogue input controls the output
0V analogue frequency of the frequency inverter.
for analogue signals
14 AIN1 Analog input 1 V=0...10V, Ri=30k, 11 P400...
from size 5 12
[set point frequency] 14 R = 10k
and above, also
-10V … +10V 16
16 AIN2 Analog input 2
17
[no function] I=0/4...20mA, Ri=250,
can be switched over The possible digital functions are
with DIP switch, described in the parameters P405...
reference voltage GND. P420...P425.
For the use of digital
functions 7.5...30V.
17 AOUT1 Analogue output 0...10V Can be used for an external display or
Reference potential GND for further processing in a following
[no function] machine.
max. load current: P418/419
5mA analogue, Datails of analogue/digital can be
20mA digital found in Parameter P418

46 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


2 Assembly and installation

Terminal Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter


[factory setting]

Terminal block X5 For SK 5x5E, external 24V supply


21 DIN1 digital input 1
P420
[ON right]
22 DIN2 digital input 2 Each digital input has a reaction time
of 1 – 2ms. P421
[ON left]
7.5...30V, Ri=6.1k 21
23 DIN3 digital input 3 22
P422
[parameter set bit0] 23
24
24 DIN4 digital input 4 25
18...30V
44
[fixed frequency 1, 40 GND/0V P423
P429] 41
motor - PTC
25 DIN5 digital input 5 Only S1 – S4
NOTE: For the motor thermistor
[no function] 2.5...30V, Ri=2.2k, (DIN5) P424 = 13 must be set.
only this input is
suitable for evaluation of (Only S1 – S4)
P424
the thermistor with 5V
S5 and above
thermistor to X13:T1 and
T2!
S1 to S4 24V supply voltage External voltage supply provided by
customer for the control unit of the
44 VI 24V frequency inverter. Is essential for the
18…30V
function of the frequency inverter.
at least 800mA (input)
Also for the connection of the digital
inputs or the supply of a 10-30V
incremental rotation encoder
S5 to S6 24V supply voltage Supply voltage provided by the
24V ± 25% frequency inverter for connection to
44 VO24V max. 200mA (output) the digital inputs or the supply of a 10-
30V encoder.
40 GND /0V Reference potential
0V digital Reference potential
for digital signals
41 VO 5V 5V supply voltage Voltage supply for motor-PTC
5V  20%
(only for S1 – S4)

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 47


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Terminal Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter


[factory setting]

Terminal block X6 (only 535E)


40 GND /0V Reference potential
0V digital
for digital signals The incremental encoder input can be
51 ENCA+ Track A used for the exact regualtion of speed
of rotation, additional set point
functions or positioning.
52 ENCA- Track A inverse An encoder system with 10-30V supply
voltage must be used in order to
TTL, RS422 P300
compensate for voltage drop in long
53 ENCB+ Track B 500…8192Imp./Rpm. cable connections. …P327

Note: Encoders with 5V supply are not


suitable in order to set up a system
54 ENCB- Track B inverse which operates reliably.

Terminal block X7 (only SK 535E)


73 RS485 + BUS connection parallel to RS485 on
Baudrate
RJ12 plug
9600…38400Baud P502
Data cable RS485 NOTE: The terminal resistance of DIP
74 RS485 - Terminal resistance …P513
switch 1 (see RJ12/RJ45) can also be
R=120
used for Kl. 73/74.
26 DIN6 digital input 6
As described for terminal block X5, P425
[no function] DIN1 to DIN5.
7.5...30V, Ri=3.3k
27 DIN7 digital input 7 Not suitable for the evaluation of a
motor thermistor. P470
[no function]
5 DOUT1 Output 3 digital output P450
[no function] S1 to S4: …P452
18-30V, each to VI 24V For evaluation in a control system. The
7 DOUT2 Output 4 max. 20mA scope of functions corresponds to the
[no function] S5 to S6: relay (P434/441). P455
24V, max. 200mA …P457

max. 100k load


44 VI 24V 24V supply voltage External voltage supply provided by
customer for the control unit of the
18…30V
frequency inverter. Is essential for the
at least 800mA function of the frequency inverter.
Internally in parallel with Kl.44 to X5!
S5 to S6 24V supply voltage Supply voltage provided by the
24V ± 25% frequency inverter for connection to
44 VO24V max. 200mA (output) the digital inputs or the supply of a
10-30V encoder.
40 GND /0V Reference potential
for digital signals 0V digital Reference potential

Terminal block X8 (only SK 511/515/535E (S5 and above: Location of X8 differs (See Section 2.11.7))
86 VO_S 24V Supply voltage When setting-up without using a safety
18-30V, each to VI 24V
87 VO_S 0V Reference potential function, wire directly to V_IS 24V.
P420
88 VI_S 0V Reference potential …P426,
24V  25%, 100mA P470
89 VI_S 24V Input Fail-safe input
Refer to technical data!
safe pulse block

48 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


2 Assembly and installation

Terminal Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter


[factory setting]
Plug block X11 (1x RJ12), RS485/RS232
Note: Coupling of two frequency inverters via the RJ12 socket must only be made via the USS BUS (RS485). Care must be taken
that no connection to the data cable is possible via RS232, in order to prevent damage to this interface.

1 RS485 A Baudrate
9600…38400Baud
2 RS485 B Data cable RS485 Terminal resistance
R=120 DIP 1 (see
below)
3 GND Reference potential P502...P513
0V digital
for Bus signals

RS485_A
RS485_B
4 232 TXD Baudrate
Data cable RS232

GN D

+ 5V
RXD
TXD
5 232 RXD 9600…38400Baud

6 +5V internal 5V supply RJ12: Pin No. 1 … 6


5V  20%
voltage
optional Adapter cable Length 3m
RJ12 to SUB-D9 Assignment of the
n.c.
SUB-D9 plug socket: n.c.
... for direct GND
RXD TxD
connection to a PC RxT
0V TXD + 5V
with NORD CON
5 1 Mat. No. 278910240
9 6

5V

DIP switches 1/2 (top side of SK 5xxE)


Plug designation X11 X10 X9

DIP switch 1
Terminal resistor for RS485 interface
(RJ12); ON = switched in

DIP switch 2
CAN _SHLD

CAN _SHLD
CAN _GN D

CAN _GN D

CAN _GN D

CAN _GN D
1 2
CAN _24V

CAN _24V
RS485_A
RS485_B

CAN _H

CAN _H
CAN _L

CAN _L
Terminal resistor for CAN/CANopen ON
GN D

+ 5V
RXD
TXD

nc
nc

nc
nc
interface (RJ12); ON = switched in
RS232/485 DIP CAN/CANopen
Plug block X9 and X10 (2x RJ45), CAN/CANopen (only SK 515E and SK 535E)
1 CAN_H CAN/CANopen
signal Baudrate …500kBaud
2 CAN_L
2x RJ45 sockets are
3 CAN_GND CAN GND connected in parallel
4 nc internally.
No function
5 nc Terminal resistance
R=120 DIP 2 (see
CAN _SHLD

CAN _SHLD

6 CAN_SHD Cable shield


CAN _GN D

CAN _GN D

CAN _GN D

CAN _GN D

below)
CAN _24V

CAN _24V
CAN _H

CAN _H
CAN _L

CAN _L

7 CAN_GND GND/0V NOTE: To operate


nc
nc

nc
nc

P502...P515
CANbus/CANopen the
8 CAN_24V External 24V DC
interface must be 2x RJ45: Pin No. 1 … 8
supply voltage
externally supplied with
24V (capacity 30mA). NOTE: For SK 53xE frequency
inverters this CANopen interface can
NOTE: Further details be used for the evaluation of an
about the connection absolute value encoder. Further details
can be found in Chapter can be found in Manual BU 0510.
2.14 RJ45 WAGO
connection module. Recommendation: Provide strain
relief (e.g. with EMC Kit)

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 49


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

2.13 Colour and contact assignments for the incremental encoder.

Cable colours,
Function Assignment for SK 52xE/53xE
for incremental encoder
15V (/ 24V) supply brown / green X5:42/44 VO 15V (/ VI / VO 24V)
0V supply white / green X6:40 GND/0V
Track A brown X6:51 ENC A+
Track A inverse green X6:52 ENC A-
Track B gray X6:53 ENC B+
Track B inverse pink X6:54 ENC B-
Track 0 red --
Track 0 inverse black --
Cable shield connected to a large area of the frequency inverter housing or shielding angle

NOTE: If there are deviations from the standard equipment (Type 5820.0H40, 10-30V
encoder, TTL/RS422) for the motors, please note the accompanying data sheet or
consult your supplier.

RECOMMENDATION: For high reliability of operation, particularly with long connecting cables, an
incremental rotation encoder for 10-30V supply voltage must be used. An external 24V
or internal 15V (/24V) voltage from the frequency inverter can be used as the voltage
supply. 5V encoders should not be used!

ATTENTION

The rotation of the incremental encoder must correspond to that of the motor.
Therefore, depending on the rotation direction of the encoder to the motor (possibly
reversed), a negative number must be set in parameter P301.

2.14 RJ45 WAGO connection module


This connection module can be used for simple cabling of the RJ45
connection functions (24V voltage supply, CANopen absolute encoder,
CANbus) with normal cables.
Pre-fabricated RJ45 patch cables are transferred with this adapter to spring
terminals (1-8 + S).
To ensure correct shield connection and strain relief, the shield U-bolt must
be used.

Supplier Description Article No.

WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH Ethernet connection module with CAGE-CLAMP connection


289-175
Transfer module RJ-45
WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH Accessories: WAGO shield U-bolt 790-108
Alternative, complete connection module and shield U-bolt Mat. Nr.
Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co.KG Connection module RJ45/Terminal 278910300

50 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


2 Assembly and installation

2.15 Setpoint card ± 10V for NORDAC SK 500E


The analog inputs of series SK 500E frequency inverters size S1 to S4 can
only process unipolar setpoints (0 … 10V; 0/4 20mA) with reference to
GROUND.
If a bipolar setpoint (analog difference signal (-10V … + 10V)) is available,
this must be converted to a 0 … 10V signal by means of a setpoint
converter. In this case, the appropriate module is available from NORD.
This module is suitable for snap-on rail-mounting and should be installed
near to the frequency inverter in the control cabinet. For further details,
please refer to the supplementary instructions for the setpoint converter.

Note: Frequency inverters of size S5 and above can process both


unipolar and bipolar setpoints by means of configuration with
DIP switches.

Supplier Designation Part no.

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co.KG Setpoint converter ±10V → 0 … 10V 278910320

Dimensions

45

60

10

30

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 51


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

3 Display and operation


In the delivery condition (without technology unit) 2 LEDs (green/red) are visible externally. These indicate the
current status of the device.
The green LED indicates that the mains voltage is present and operational, while a flashing code that
increases in speed shows the degree of overload at the frequency inverter output.
The red LED signals actual error by flashing with a frequency which corresponds to the number code of the
error (Section. 6).

3.1 Modular modules


By combining different modules for display, control and parameterisation, the NORDAC SK 5xxE can be easily
adapted to various requirements.
Alphanumerical display and operating modules can be used for simple start-up. For more complex tasks,
various connections to a PC or an automation system can be selected.
The technology unit (Technology Unit, SK TU3-…) is connected externally to the frequency inverter and is
therefore easy to access and replace at any time.

LED
red/green

WARNING Modules should not be inserted or removed unless the device is free of voltage. The slots may
only be used for the applicable modules.
NOTE:
Installation of a technology unit separate from the frequency inverter is not possible. It must be
connected directly to the frequency inverter.

Further detailed information can be found in the Options manuals.


- www.nord.com -

52 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


3.2 Technology unit overview

3.2 Technology unit overview


Module Description Data
For the commissioning, parameterisation, configuration and 4-digit 7 segment LED display,
SimpleBox
control of the frequency inverter. Storage of the parameters single button operation
SK CSX-0 is not possible. Mat. No. 275900095
For the commissioning, parameterisation, configuration and 4-digit, 7-segment LED display,
ControlBox
control of the frequency inverter. Storage of the parameters keyboard
SK TU3-CTR is possible by means of P550. Mat. No. 275900090
For the commissioning, parameterisation, configuration and 4 digit back-lit LCD display,
ParameterBox
control of the frequency inverter. Up to 5 parameter sets can keyboard
SK TU3-PAR be stored. Mat. No. 275900100
Baud rate: 1.5 MBaud
Profibus module This option enables control of the SK 5xxE via the Profibus Connector: Sub-D9
SK TU3-PBR DP serial port
Mat. No. 275900030
Baud rate: 12 MBaud
Connector: Sub-D9
Profibus module This option enables control of the SK 5xxE via the Profibus ext. 24V voltage supply, 2 pin
SK TU3-PBR-24V DP serial port connector
Mat. No. 275900160
Baud rate: up to 1 MBit/s
CANopen module This option enables control of the SK 5xxE via the CANbus Connector: Sub-D9
SK TU3-CAO serial port, using the CANopen protocol
Mat. No. 275900075
Baud rate: 500 KBit/s
DeviceNet module This option enables control of the SK 5xxE via the DeviceNet 5 pin screw connector
SK TU3-DEV serial port using the DeviceNet protocol.
Mat. No. 275900085
Baud rate: 500 kBit/s (2Mbit/s)
InterBus module This option enables control of the SK 5xxE via the InterBus Connector: 2 x Sub-D9
SK TU3-IBS serial port.
Mat. No. 275900065
4 sensors / 2 actuators
AS interface Actuator-sensor interface is a bus system for the lower field 5 / 8 pin screw connector
SK TU3-AS1 bus level, used for simple control tasks.
Mat. No. 275900170
PotentiometerBox The Potentiometer Box is used for the direct control of the ON, OFF, R/L, 0…100%
SK TU3-POT frequency inverter, without external components. Mat. No. 275900110

Installing the technology unit


The technology units must be installed as follows:
1. Switch off the mains.
2. Push the control terminals cover down slightly or remove.
3. Remove the blind cover by
loosening the release on the lower
edge and pulling off with an upward
turning movement. If necessary, the
fixing screw next to the release must
be removed.
4. Hook the technology unit onto the
upper edge and press in lightly until
engaged. Ensure full contact with
the connector strip and fasten with
the screws if necessary (separate
packet).
5. Close the control terminal cover
again.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 53


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

3.2.1 SimpleBox, SK CSX-0


This option is used as a simple parameterisation, display and control tool for the
frequency inverter SK 5xxE. With this, even in active BUS operation, data can
be read out and parameterisation made especially if the frequency inverter slot
is occupied with a BUS unit.

Features
 4-digit, 7-segment LED display

 Single button operation

 Display of the active parameter set and operating values

After the SimpleBox has been attached, the cable connectors plugged in and
the mains has been switched on, horizontal lines appear in the 4-digit 7-
segment display. This display signals the operational readiness of the frequency
inverter.
If a jog frequency value is pre-set in parameter P113, or a minimum frequency
is pre-set in P104, the display flashes with this value.
If the frequency inverter is enabled, the display changes automatically to the
operating value selected in parameter >Selection Display value< P001 (factory
setting = current frequency).
The actual parameter set is shown by the 2 LEDs next to the display on the left
in binary code.

NOTE

Settings should only be implemented by qualified personnel, strictly in accordance with


the warning and safety information.

Installation
The SimpleBox can be attached to any technology unit (SK TU3-…) or to the blind cover. To remove it, simply
pull it off after the RJ12 connection has been detached (press in the latching lever on the RJ12 connector).

Connection
Top side of device
The SimpleBox is connected to the socket at the upper
edge of the frequency inverter using the RJ12
connector/cable. X11 X10
X10 X9
X9
If necessary DIP switch 1 (left) can be used to activate a
BUS connection resistor for the RS485 interface. This may 22 xx RJ45,
RJ45, nicht
not with
bei
be necessary if the frequency inverter is to be connected to RJ12 SK 500E/505E/510E
SK 500E/505E/510E
an overriding control unit from a great distance.
Further details can be found in Section 2.12.1.

54 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


3.2 Technology unit overview

Functions of the SimpleBox:


When the frequency inverter is ready for operation any initial value (P104/P113 for keyboard
operation) is indicated by a flashing display. This frequency is immediately used on being enabled.
7 Segment
During operation, the currently set operating value (selection in P001) or an error code (Section 6) is
LED display
displayed.
During parameterisation, the parameter numbers or the parameter values are shown.
The LEDs indicate the actual operating parameter set in the operating display (P000) and the current
LEDs parameter set being parameterised. The display is in binary code.

1 2 1 2
= P1 = P2 = P3 = P4
1 2 1 2 1 2

Turn the knob


Turn the knob to the right in order to increase the parameter number or the parameter value.
to the right
Turn the knob
Turn the knob to the left in order to reduce the parameter number or the parameter value.
to the left
Briefly press Briefly pressing the knob = “ENTER” function in order to store a changed parameter or to change from
the knob parameter number to parameter value.
Press the knob If the knob is pressed for a longer period, the display changes to the next higher level, if necessary
for longer without storing a parameter change.

Menu structure with the SimpleBox


Op era ting va lues

P7 - -
displa y (or op eratio nal)
fo llo wing ma in s ON
P6 - -
_ _ _ _
P5 - -

P0 - - P4 - -
P1- - P2 - - P3 - -
P0 0 1 P4 0 0
P10 0 P2 0 0 P3 0 0
P0 0 2 P4 0 1
P10 1 P2 0 1 P3 0 1
P0 0 3

P4 8 3
P114 P2 2 0 P3 2 7

NOTE: Some parameters P465, P475, P480…P483, P502, P510, P534, P701…P706, P707, P718,
P740/741 and P748 have additional levels (arrays), in which further adjustments can be made,
e.g.:

Setting:
P5 0 2 EN T ER
P_ 0 1 E NT E R
of f Value of leading function1

VA L U E

Setting:
P_ 0 2 E NT E R
of f Value of leading function2

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 55


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

3.2.2 ControlBox, SK TU3-CTR


This option is used as a simple parameterisation, display and control tool
for the frequency inverter SK 5xxE.

Features
 4-digit, 7-segment LED display

 Direct control of a frequency inverter

 Display of the active parameter set and operating values

 Storage of a complete inverter data set (P550),


e.g. for transfer of data to other frequency inverters.

After the ControlBox has been attached, the cable connectors plugged in
and the mains has been switched on, horizontal lines appear in the 4-digit 7-segment display. This display
signals the operational readiness of the frequency inverter.
If a creep frequency value is pre-set in parameter P113, or a minimum frequency is pre-set in P104, the
display flashes with this initial value.
If the frequency inverter is enabled, the display changes automatically to the operating value selected in
parameter >Selection Display value< P001 (factory setting = current frequency).
The actual parameter set in use is shown by the 2 LEDs next to the display on the left in binary code.

The digital frequency setpoint is factory set to 0Hz. To check whether the motor is working, a
NOTE
frequency setpoint must be entered with the or key or a jog frequency via the respective
parameter >Jog frequency< (P113).
Settings should only be implemented by qualified personnel, strictly in accordance with the
warning and safety information.

ATTENTION : The motor may start immediately after pressing the START key !

56 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


3.2 Technology unit overview

ControlBox functions:

Switching on the frequency inverter. The frequency inverter is now enabled with the set jog frequency
(P113). A preset minimum frequency (P104) may at least be provided. Parameter >Interface< P509 and
P510 must = 0.

Switching off the frequency inverter. The output frequency is reduced to the absolute minimum
frequency (P505) and the frequency inverter shuts down.

4 permanently displayed underscores (_ _ _ _) indicate readiness for operation if there is no setpoint. If


these underscores are flashing, the frequency inverter is not ready for operation (switch-on lock, e.g.
function “safe pulse block”), or there is, or was, an error. This must first be rectified.
7 Segment
When the frequency inverter is ready for operation any initial value (P104/P113 for keyboard operation)
LED display
is indicated by a flashing display. This frequency is immediately used on being enabled.
4-digit
During operation, the currently set operating value (selection in P001) or an error code (Section 6) is
displayed.
During parameterisation, the parameter numbers or the parameter values are shown.
The LEDs indicate the actual operating parameter set in the operating display (P000) and the actual
LEDs parameter set being parameterised during parameterisation. Tin this case the display is coded in binary
form.
1
1 1 1 1
2 = P1 = P2 = P3 = P4
2 2 2 2

The motor rotation direction changes when this key is pressed. "Rotation to the left" is indicated by a
minus sign. Attention! Take care when operating pumps. screw conveyors, ventilators, etc. Block the
key with parameter P540.

Press key to increase the frequency. During parameterisation, the parameter number or parameter
value is increased

Press the key to reduce the frequency. During parameterisation, the parameter number or parameter
value is reduced.

Press "ENTER" to store an altered parameter value, or to switch between parameter number or
parameter value.

NOTE: If a changed value is not to be stored, the key can be used to exit the parameter without
storing the change.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 57


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameterisation with the ControlBox


The frequency inverter can only be controlled via the ControlBox, if it has not previously been enabled via the
control terminals or via a serial interface (P509 = 0 and P510 = 0). In addition, for this the parameter
“PotentiometerBox Function” (P549) must not be set to function {4} “Frequency addition” or function {5}
“Frequency subtraction”.

If the "START" key is pressed, the frequency inverter in the operating display changes (selection P001). The
frequency inverter supplies 0Hz or a higher minimum frequency (P104) or jog frequency (P113) which has
been set.

Parameter set display Quick stop


(press simultaneously)

START STOP

Change rotation direction Store current frequency


as jog frequency

Decrease frequency Increase frequency

Set frequency= 0Hz (press


simultaneously)

Parameter set display:


The LEDs indicate the actual operating parameter set in the operating display (P000) and the current
parameter set being parameterised ( P000). There, the display appears in binary form.
The parameter set can also be changed during operation via the parameter P100 (control via ControlBox).

Frequency setpoint:
The current frequency setpoint depends on the setting in the parameters jog frequency (P113) and minimum
frequency (P104). This value can be altered during keyboard operation with the value keys and
permanently stored in P113 as the jog frequency by pressing the ENTER key.

Quick stop:
By simultaneously pressing the STOP key and the "Change direction key” , an quick stop can be
initiated.

Frequency addition:
If the parameter “PotentiometerBox Function” (P549) has been set to function {4}”Frequency addition” or
function {5} “Frequency subtraction”, as of software version 1.7 a setpoint can be added via the Control Box,
even if enabling and other setpoints are provided from another source (control terminals, BUS).
However, after the drive unit has been shut down, this additive setpoint is reset to zero.
By pressing the ENTER key however, the set value is permanently stored in parameter P113 as the jog
frequency, and continues to be available as a setpoint value on re-enabling after shutdown.

58 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


3.2 Technology unit overview

Parameterisation with the ControlBox


The parameterisation of the frequency inverter can be performed in the various operating states. All
parameters can always be changed online. Switching to the parameter mode occurs in different ways
depending upon the operating states and the enabling source.
1. If there is no enable (if necessary, press the STOP key ) via the ControlBox, control terminals or a
serial interface, it is still possible to switch to the parameterisation mode directly from the operating
value display with the value keys or . P0__ / P7__
2. If an enable is present via the control terminals or a serial interface and the frequency inverter is
producing an output frequency, it is also possible to switch to the parameterisation mode directly from
the operating value display using the value keys and .  P0__ / P7__

3. If the inverter is enabled via the ControlBox (START key ), the parameterisation mode can be
reached by pressing the START and ENTER keys + simultaneously.

4. Switching back to the control mode is achieved by pressing the START key .

Parameter set display Switching from control to


parameterisation while the
drive is running
(see Point 3)
Switching from parame-
terisation to control
(see Point 3) Select menu group,
display parameter value

Previous menu group or Next menu group or


parameter number parameter number

One level each time back to


the operating value display

Exception: If the parameter “PotentiometerBox Function” (P549) has been set to function {4} "Frequency
addition" or function {5} "Frequency subtraction", as of software version 1.7 an online
parameterisation via the ControlBox can no longer be carried out. i.e. the drive unit must be
shut down for parameterisation via the ControlBox.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 59


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Changing parameter values

To access the parameter section, one of the value keys, or must be pressed. The display changes to
the menu group display P 0 _ _ ... P 7 _ _ . After pressing the ENTER key access to the menu group is
obtained and the required parameter can be selected with the value keys.
All parameters are arranged in order in the individual menu groups in a continuous scroll pattern. It is therefore
possible to scroll forwards and backwards within this section.
Each parameter has a parameter number  P x x x . The significance and description of the parameters starts
in Section 5 "Parameterisation"

NOTE: Some parameters P465, P475, P480…P483, P502, P510, P534, P701…P706, P707, P718,
P740/741 and P748 have additional levels (arrays), in which further adjustments can be made,
e.g.:

Setting:
P5 0 2 EN T ER
P_ 0 1 E NT E R
of f Value of leading function1

VA L U E

Setting:
P_ 0 2 E NT E R
of f Value of leading function2

60 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


3.2 Technology unit overview

Menu structure with the SimpleBox

Operating values
display (or operational)
following m ains ON P7 - - P6 - -
_ _ _ _
P5 - -

P0 - - P4 - -
P1- - P2 - - P3 - -
P0 0 1 P4 0 0
P10 0 P2 0 0 P3 0 0
P0 0 2 P4 0 1
P10 1 P2 0 1 P3 0 1
P0 0 3

P4 8 3
P114 P3 2 7
P2 2 0

To change a parameter value, the ENTER key must be pressed when the applicable parameter number
is displayed.

Changes can then be made using the VALUE keys or and must be confirmed with to save them
and leave the parameter.
As long as a changed value has not been confirmed by pressing ENTER, the value display will flash; this value
has not yet been stored in the frequency inverter.
During parameter changes, the display does not blink so that the display is more legible.
If a change is not to be saved, the "DIRECTION" key can be pressed to leave the parameter.

Parameter set display

Do not save Accept changed values


changed value

Reduce the value Increase value

Value to factory setting

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 61


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

3.2.3 ParameterBox, SK TU3-PAR


This option is for simple parameterisation and control of the frequency
inverter, as well as the display of current operating settings and states.
Up to 5 data sets can be stored and managed, stored and transferred in
this device. This enables an efficient start-up for serial applications.

NOTE: In order to be able to use the ParameterBox SK PAR-2H /-2E


(external manual control / switching cabinet unit) on the
SK 5xxE, this must at least be equipped with software version
3.5 R1. To ensure reliable operation the SK PAR-2H /-2E must
be connected to a stable 5V supply.
(For further information, see Handbook BU 0040)

Features of the ParameterBox


 Illuminated, high resolution LCD graphics screen

 Large-screen display of individual operating parameters

 6 language display

 Help text for error diagnosis

 5 complete inverter data sets can be stored in the memory, loaded and processed

 For use as a display for various operating parameters

 Standardisation of individual operating parameters to display specific system data

 Direct control of a frequency inverter

Information from the ParameterBox


After lugging the ParameterBox onto the frequency inverter and switching on the mains for the first time, there
is initially an enquiry as the menu language, German or English.
Then the ParameterBox automatically carried out a “bus scan”, during which the connected frequency
inverters are identified.
In the following display, the type of frequency inverter, its actual operating condition and the current status can
be seen.
After the inverter has been enabled, the display mode changes to the 3 current operate values (frequency,
voltage, current). The operating values displayed can be selected from a list of 19 possible values (in the
>Display< / > Values< menu).

NOTE The digital frequency setpoint is factory set to 0Hz. To check whether the motor is working, a
frequency setpoint must be entered with the or key or a jog frequency via the
respective menu level >Parameterise<, >Base parameters< and the respective parameter
>Jog frequency< (P113)
Settings should only be implemented by qualified personnel, strictly in accordance with the
warning and safety information.

ATTENTION : The motor may start immediately after pressing the START key !

62 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


3.2 Technology unit overview

Functions of the ParameterBox

LCD Graphic-capable, backlit LCD display for displaying operational values and parameters for the connected
Display frequency inverter and ParameterBox parameters.

Using the SELECTION keys enables toggling between the menu levels and menu items.
Press the and keys together to go back one level.

The contents of individual parameters can be altered with the VALUES keys.

Press the and keys together to load the default values of the parameter selected.
When controlling the inverter using the keyboard, the frequency setpoint is set using the VALUE keys.
Here the ramp time is limited to 0.17s/Hz, if small values are set in P002/P003.

Press the ENTER key to select a menu group or accept the changed menu item or parameter value.
NOTE: If a parameter is to exited, without a new value being stored, then one of the SELECTION
keys can be used for the purpose.
If the inverter is to be controlled directly from the keyboard (not control terminals), then the current
setpoint frequency can be stored under the Jog Frequency parameter (P113).

START key for switching on the frequency inverter.

NOTE: can only be used


STOP key for switching off the frequency inverter. with the external SK PAR-
2H/ -2E if this function is
enabled in Parameter P509
The direction of rotation of the motor changes when the DIRECTION key is or P540.
pressed. Rotation direction left is indicated by a minus sign.
Attention! Take care when operating pumps, screw conveyors, ventilators,
etc.

LEDs The LED's indicate the current status of the ParameterBox.


DS (ON (green)) The ParameterBox is connected to the power supply and is operational.
DS Device State
DE
DE (ERROR (red) An error has occurred while processing data or in the connected frequency
Device Error inverter.

LCD-Display

Frequency inverter type Device output, mains voltage

500E 1.1kW / 230V 1


Current operating values:
Fi/Hz U/V I/A
Frequency, voltage, current
45.0 190 2.4
ONLINE FI P1 R RUNNING

Connection to Device condition: Parameter


frequency inverter set, direction of rotation and
status (Ready / Warning / Error)

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 63


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Menu structure
The menu structure consists of various levels that are each arranged in a ring structure. The ENTER key
moves the menu on to the next level. Simultaneous operation of the SELECTION keys moves the menu back
a level.

500E 1.1kW / 230V 1 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5


Fi/Hz U/V I/A 1 - - - -
45.0 190 2.4 OK - - - -
ONLINE FI P1 R RUNNING 90

Display 1 Options 1

Parameterisation 1 Adm inistrate 1


param eters

P1001 2 P1301 2
Bus scan Language
P1101 2 P1201 2
Object selection Copy - Source

P1002 2 P1302 2
FI selection Operating m ode
Operating displays 2 P1202 2
>ENTER< (to level 3.) Copy - Target

P1003 2 P1303 2
Display m ode Autom atic bus scan
Basic param eters 2 P1203 2
>ENTER< (to level 3.) Copy - Start

P1004 2 P1304 2
Values for display Contrast
M otor data 2 P1204 2
>ENTER< (to level 3.) Load default values

P1005 2 P1305 2
Standardisat. factor Set password
P1205 2
Delete m emory

P0 2 P1306 2
Back Frequency inverter- Box password
m enu structure P0 2
 Section 5
Param eterisation
Back

P1307
P0 2
zurückBoxparam .
Reset

P1308
P0 2
P0 2
zurück
NORDAC p-box
Back Version 4.0 R3

P0 2
Back

>Display< (P11xx), >Administer Parameters< (P12xx) and >Options< (P13xx) are purely ParameterBox-
parameters and do not have direct influence on frequency inverter parameters.

Via the menu >Parametrerising< the frequency inverter structure can be accessed, if necessary after
selection of the object, if frequency inverter data sets are already stored in the ParameterBox.

The description of the frequency inverter parameters is in Section 5 of this description.

64 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


3.2 Technology unit overview

Select language, short description


The following steps must be carried out to change the menu language used in the ParameterBox display.
On switching on the ParameterBox for the first time, “German” or “English” will be offered for selection.
The selection is made by pressing the selection keys (arrow R/L) and confirming with the ENTER key.
In the following, “German” was selected on switching on for the first time. After this selection the following
displays should appear (varies depending upon output and options).
500E 1.1kW/230V 1
Initial display > NORDAC <
Frequenzumrichter
ONLINE FU P1 ESperre

Use the Selection keys or , Optionen


to scroll to the Optionen menu >ENTER<
ONLINE FU P1 ESperre

P1301 2

then press >ENTER< Sprache


Deutsch ...
ONLINE FU P1 ESperre

... English
... Français
Using the Value key or , ... Espanol
select the required language ... Sverige
... Nederlands

P1301 2
Language
After selection press >ENTER< English (p.e.)
ONLINE FU P1 READY

1
Options
Press both Selection keys ( and )
simultaneously >ENTER<
ONLINE FU P1 READY

500E 1.1kW/230V 1
> NORDAC <
Press both Selection keys ( and )
simultaneously Frequency Inverter
ONLINE FU P1 READY

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 65


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Controlling the frequency inverter with the ParameterBox


The frequency inverter can only be completely controlled via the ParameterBox if the parameter >Interface<
(P509) is set to the >Control terminal or Keyboard< function (=0) (factory setting) and the inverter is not
enabled via the control terminal.

START (Enable) No inverter control


function

STOP (Enable)
Increase frequency

Change rotation direction Decrease frequency

Store current frequency

Note: If the frequency inverter is enabled in this mode, then the parameter set is used, which is selected
for this frequency inverter in the Menu >Parameterisation< ... >Basic parameters< ... under
Parameters >Parameter set<.

Attention: Following the START command, the frequency inverter may start up immediately with a pre-
programmed frequency (minimum frequency P104 or jog frequency P113).

Frequency addition:
If the parameter “Potentiometer Box Function” (P549) has been set to function {4}”Frequency addition” or
function {5} “Frequency subtraction”, as of software version 1.7 a setpoint can be added via the Control Box,
even if enabling and other setpoints are provided from another source (control terminals, BUS).

To activate this function, the STOP key on the ParameterBox must also be pressed.
Pressing the value keys or increases or decreases the present frequency.
Pressing the STOP key or the ENTER key saves the additive value set via the value keys as the jog
frequency in parameter P113.

66 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


3.2 Technology unit overview

Parameterising with the ParameterBox


The parameterising mode is entered by selecting the menu group >Parameterising< in level 1 of the
ParameterBox and confirming this with the ENTER key. The parameter level of the connected frequency
inverter is now visible.

SELECTION keys VALUE keys

Selection forward
Increase value

Simultaneous operation
one menu level back Simultaneous activation:
load default parameters

Selection back
Reduce value

One menu level forward or


accept parameter value

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 67


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Screen layout during parameterisation


If the setting of a parameter is changed, then the value flashes intermittently until confirmed with the ENTER
key. In order to retain the factory settings for the parameter being edited, both VALUE keys must be operated
simultaneously. Even in this case, the setting must be confirmed with the ENTER key in order for the change
to be stored.
If the change is not to be stored, then pressing one of the SELECTION keys will call up the previously stored
value and pressing a SELECTION key again will exit the parameter.

Parameter to be edited (No.) Parameter set to be edited

Parameter to be
edited (text) P102 PS1 3
Menu structure level
Acceleration time
Current 2.90 s
parameter value
ONLINE FI P1 E ready Status of the control
medium
Actual status
of the
ParameterBox Selected Active parameter set
control medium in control medium

NOTE: The lowest line in the display is used to display the current status of the box and the frequency
inverter being controlled.

NOTE: Some parameters P502, P701 to 706, P707, P718, P741/742 and P745/746 also have an array-
level in which further settings can be made. The required array level must first be selected (see
parameterisation, Section 5) and confirmed with ENTER. The required parameter setting can now
be made.

P502 PS1 [01] 3


Leading function value
Array level of the
Off selected parameter.
ONLINE FI P1 E ready E.g. [01], [02], [03]...

68 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


3.2 Technology unit overview

3.2.4 ParameterBox parameters


The following main functions are assigned to the menu groups:

Menu group No. Master function


Display (P10xx): Selection of operating values and display layout
Parametrierung (P11xx): Programming of the connected inverter and all storage media
Parameter administration (P12xx): Copying and storage of complete parameter sets from storage media and
inverters
Options (P14xx): Setting the ParameterBox functions and all automatic processes

Parameter display

Parameter Setting value / Description / Note

P1001 Bus scan


Off / Start A bus scan is initiated with this parameter. During this process a progress indicator is shown
in the display.
[Off]
After a bus scan, the display reverts to the basic menu. Parameter P1001 is reset to “Off”.
Depending on the result of this process, the ParameterBox goes into the "ONLINE" or
"OFFLINE" operating mode.

P1002 FI selection
FI and S1 … S5 Selection of the current item to be parameterised/controlled.
[FI] The display and further operating actions refer to the item selected. In the inverter selection
list, only those devices detected during the bus scan are shown. The current object appears
in the status line.

P1003 Display mode


Value range: Selection of the operating values display for the ParameterBox
see right hand column
Standard any 3 values next to each other
[Standard] List Any 3 values with units below each other
Large display 1 value with unit
ControlBox 1 value without unit

P1004 Values for display


Value range: Selection of a display value for the actual value display of the ParameterBox.
see right hand column The value selected is placed in the first position of an internal list for the display value and is
then also used in the Large Display mode.
[Actual frequency]
According to the setting in parameter 8P1003) up to 3 operating values can be selected for
display. The selection is made in sequence, whereby the last selected value is inserted from
the left or at the top of the display.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 69


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter Setting value / Description / Note

Display
>ENTER< / >OK<
ONLINE U1 P1 E ready

P1001
P1002
P0

P1003
P1005

P1004 2
Value keys
Values for display
Actual frequency
Value + Value -
ONLINE U1 P1 E ready
Possible actual values
Press selection keys
Auswahltasten
for the display:
zugleich drücken
simultaneously ControlBox*
+ OK Actual bus value abnormal
ZK voltage
Setpoint frequency
P1004 2 Instantaneous current
Values for display Speed
Current
- Value applied - Voltage
U1 P1 E ready Actual frequency
ONLINE
*corresponding to setting (P001)

Example: The following sequence of entries results


in the operating display shown below:
Input sequence:
OK OK OK
Current Voltage Actual frequency

530E 370W/230V 1
Fi/Hz U/V I/A
45.0 360 3.4
ONLINE U1 P1 R RUNNING

Note: According to the version, the display or keyboard symbols vary between “OK”
“ENTER” or “ “.

P1005 Standardisation factor


-327.67 … +327.67 The first value on the display list is scaled with the standardisation factor. If this
standardisation factor deviates from 1.00, the unit of the scaled value is no longer displayed.
[1.00]

70 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


3.2 Technology unit overview

Parameterisation
Parameter Setting value / Description / Note

P1101 Object selection


FI and S1 … S5 Selection of the object to be parameterised.
[…] The ongoing parameterisation process relates to the object selected. Only the devices and
storage objects recognised during the bus scan are available in the selection list.
This parameter is not shown if only one device is recognised and there is no storage object
available.

Parameter administration
Parameter Setting value / Description / Note

P1201 Copy - Source


FI and S1 … S5 Selection of the current source object to be copied.
In the selection list, only the frequency inverters and storage objects detected during the bus
[…] scan are shown.

P1202 Copy - Target


FI and S1 … S5 Selection of current target object to copy.
In the selection list, only the frequency inverters and storage objects detected during the bus
[…] scan are shown.

P1203 Copy - Start


Start / Off This parameter triggers a process, whereby all the parameters selected in >Copy – Source<
are transferred to the object specified in the >Copy – Target< parameter.
[Off] If there is a possibility of overwriting data (e.g. for the transfer of data from a memory to a
connected inverter) an additional confirmation window is displayed. The transfer starts after
confirmation.

P1204 Load default values


FI and S1 … S5 In this parameter, the default settings are written to the parameters of the selected item.
This function is particularly important when editing storage objects. It is only via this
[…] parameter that a hypothetical inverter can be loaded and processed with the ParameterBox.

P1205 Delete memory


S1 ... S5 In this parameter the data in the selected storage medium is deleted.
[ S1 ]

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 71


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Options
Parameter Setting value / Description / Note
P1301 Language
Value range: Selection of languages for operation of the ParameterBox
see right hand column
Available languages: German English
[…] Dutch French
Spanish Swedish

P1302 Operating mode


Value range: Selection of the operating mode for the NORDAC ParameterBox
see right hand column
 Offline:
[Online] The ParameterBox is operated autonomously. No PC or frequency inverter is connected.
The storage objects of the ParameterBox can be parameterised and administrated.
 Online:
One or more inverters are located at the interface of the ParameterBox. The frequency
inverter can be parameterised and controlled. When changing to the “ONLINE” operating
mode, a bus scan is started automatically.
 PC slave:
Only possible with ParameterBox SK PAR-2H/ -2E or SK PAR-3H.

P1303 Automatic bus scan


On, Off Setting the switch-on characteristics.
[On]  Off
No bus scan is carried out, the frequency inverters connected before the switch-off are
located after switching on.
If the connection configuration has been changed (e.g. a different inverter has been
connected), error 223 is generated.
 On
A bus scan is automatically implemented when the ParameterBox is switched on.

P1304 Contrast
0 ... 100 % Contrast setting of the ParameterBox display
[ 50 ]

P1305 Set password


0 ... 9999 The user can set up a password in this parameter.
[0] If a value other than 0 has been entered in this parameter, then the settings of the
ParameterBox or the parameters of the connected frequency inverter cannot be altered.

P1306 Box password


0 ... 9999 If the password function is to be reset, the password selected in the >Set Password<
parameter must be entered here. If the correct password is selected, all of the
[0] ParameterBox functions and the parameters of the connected frequency inverter can be
used again.
NOTE: In case the password is not known and parameterisation of the inverter needs to be
carried out, please contact our Technical Support.

P1307 Reset Box parameter


Start, Off With this parameter the ParameterBox can be reset to the default setting. All ParameterBox
settings and the data in the storage media will be deleted.
[Off]

P1308 NORDAC p-box


Version ... R … Displays the software version of the ParameterBox. Please keep to hand.
[…]

72 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


3.2 Technology unit overview

3.2.5 ParameterBox error messages

Display Fault Cause


Error number text in the Parameter Box  Remedy

Communication error
200 Illegal parameter number
201 Parameter value cannot be
changed These error messages are due to EMC interferences or differing
202 Parameter value out of range software versions of the participants.
 Check the software version of the ParameterBox and that of the
203 Faulty SUB Index connected frequency inverter.
204 No Array parameter  Check the cabling of all components, regarding possible EMC
interference
205 Incorrect parameter type
206 Incorrect response identifier
USS interface
207 Checksum error of Communication between frequency inverter and ParameterBox is faulty
USS interface (EMC), safe operation cannot be guaranteed.
 Check the connection to the frequency inverter. Use a shielded
cable between the devices. Route the BUS leads separately from
the motor cables.

208 Incorrect status identifier Communication between frequency inverter and ParameterBox is faulty
USS interface (EMC), safe operation cannot be guaranteed.
 Check the connection to the frequency inverter.
Use a shielded cable between the devices. Route the BUS leads
separately from the motor cables.

209 Inverter not responding The ParameterBox is waiting for a response from the connected frequency
inverter. The waiting time has elapsed without a response being received.
5. Check the connection to the frequency inverter.
The settings of the USS parameters for the frequency
inverter were changed during operation.

Identification errors
220 Unknown device Device ID not found.
The connected inverter is not listed in the database of the ParameterBox;
no communication can be established.
 Please contact your Getriebebau Nord Representative.

221 Software version not The software of the connected frequency inverter is not listed in the
recognised ParameterBox database, no communication can be set up.
 Please contact your Getriebebau Nord Representative.

222 Inverter extension level not An unknown module has been detected in the frequency inverter
recognised (Customer interface / Special extension).
 Please check the modules installed in the frequency inverter

 If necessary, check the software version of the ParameterBox


and the frequency inverter.

223 Bus configuration has changed After restoring the last Bus configuration, a device is reported that is
different from the one stored.
This error can only occur if the parameter >Auto. Bus Scan< is set to OFF
and another device has been connected to the ParameterBox.
 Activate the automatic Bus scan function.

224 Device is not supported The inverter type entered in the ParameterBox is not supported!
The ParameterBox cannot be used with this frequency inverter.

225 The connection to the Access to a device that is not online (previous Time Out error).
inverter is blocked 0 = Carry out a bus scan via the parameter >Bus Scan< (P1001).

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 73


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Display Fault Cause


Error number text in the Parameter Box  Remedy
ParameterBox operating error
226 Source and target are different Copying objects of different types (from / to different inverters) is not
devices possible.

227 Source is empty Copying of data from a deleted (empty) storage medium

228 This combination is not Target and source for the copying function are the same. The command
permitted cannot be carried out.

229 Object selected is empty Parameterisation attempt of a deleted storage medium

230 Different software versions Warning


Copying objects with different software versions can lead to problems when
transferring parameters.

231 Invalid password Attempt to alter a parameter without a valid Box password being entered in
parameter >Box Password< P 1306.

232 Bus scan only during  A bus scan (search for a connected frequency inverter) is only
operation: online possible when in ONLINE mode.

Warnings
240 Overwrite data?
Yes No
241 Delete data?
Yes No
These warnings indicate that there is a possibly significant change which
242 Move SW version? needs additional confirmation.

Next Cancel Once the next procedure has been selected, it must be confirmed with the
"ENTER" key.
243 Move series?
Next Cancel
242 Delete all data?
Yes No
Inverter control error
250 This function is not enabled The function requested is not enabled at the frequency inverter parameter
interface.
 Change the value of the parameter >Interface< of the connected
inverter to the required function.
More detailed information can be obtained from the operating
instructions for the frequency inverter.

251 Control command was not The control command cannot be implemented by the frequency inverter, as
successful a higher priority function, e.g. Quick stop or an OFF signal to the control
terminals of the frequency inverter is present.

252 Control is not possible offline Call up of a control function in Offline mode.
 Change the operating mode of the ParameterBox in the
parameter >Operating Mode< P1302 to Online and repeat the
action.

253 Error acknowledgement not The acknowledgement of an error at the frequency inverter was not
successful successful, the error message remains.

Error message from inverter


Inverter error Inverter error text A fault has occurred in the inverter with the number displayed. The inverter
number error number and text are displayed.

74 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


3.2 Technology unit overview

3.2.6 Profibus module, SK TU3-PBR, …-24V


A large number of different automation
devices can exchange data using Profibus.
PLC's, PC's, operating and monitoring
devices can all communicate via a uniform
bus in serial bit mode.
Data exchange is specified in DIN 19245
Part 1 and 2 and application specific
upgrades in Part 3 of this standard. Within
the European field bus standardisation
process, Profibus is integrated into the
European field bus standard pr EN 50170.
The termination resistor for the last bus
participant is located in the Profibus
standard plug.
The module SK TU3-PBR does not require
an external supply voltage, as it is supplied
internally by the frequency inverter. Because of this, bus communication is only possible if the frequency
inverter is connected to the mains, or for devices with an external low voltage supply (SK 5x5E), the 24V
control voltage is available.
The module SK TU3-BPR-24V requires an external 24V supply, and can therefore be operated even if the
frequency inverter is not connected to the mains, or the module is not plugged into the inverter.
Detailed information can be found in the operating instructions BU 0020 or contact the supplier of the
frequency inverter.

BR (green) BUS ready


Profibus status LEDs
BE (red) BUS error

3.2.7 CANopen module, SK TU3-CAO


The CANopen interface on the NORDAC frequency inverter enables the
parameterisation and control of the devices in accordance with standardised
CANopen specifications
Up to 127 participants can be addressed on a single Bus. A termination
resistor is integrated and can be switched on.
The transfer rate (10kBaud and 500kBaud) and the Bus addresses are set
using rotary coding switches or the applicable parameters.

Detailed information can be found in the operating instructions BU 0060, or


contact the supplier of the frequency inverter.

CR (green) CANopen RUN LED


CANopen Status LEDs
CE (red) CANopen ERROR LED
DR (green) Module status
Module status LEDs
DE (red) Module error

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 75


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

3.2.8 DeviceNet module, SK TU3-DEV


DeviceNet is an open communication profile for distributed industrial
automation systems. It is based on the CANbus system.
Up to 64 participants can be linked to one Bus system.
The transfer rate (125. 250. 500 kBit/s) and the Bus addresses are set
using rotary coding switches or the applicable parameters.
Detailed information can be found in the operating instructions BU
0080, or contact the supplier of the frequency inverter.

MS (red/green) Module status


DeviceNet status LEDs
MS (red/green) Mains (bus) status
DS (green) Module status
Module status LEDs
DE (red) Module error

3.2.9 InterBus module, SK TU3-IBS


With InterBus up to 256 participants with different automation devices
can exchange data. PLC's, PC's, operating and monitoring devices can
all communicate via a uniform bus in serial bit mode.
NORDAC frequency inverters are remote bus participants. The data
width is variable (3 words; 5 words), at a baud rate of 500kBit/s
(optional 2Mbit/s). An additional termination resistor is not necessary as
it is already integrated. Addressing is carried out automatically by
means of the physical arrangement of the participants.
An external 24V supply is required for uninterrupted Bus operation.
Detailed information can be found in the operating instructions BU
0070, or contact the supplier of the frequency inverter.

Module status LEDs ST (red/green) Module error/ready


UL (green) Supply voltage applied
RC (green) Remote Check, remote bus to previous InterBus device is OK.
BA (green) Bus Active, InterBus data are being exchanged (Bus running).
InterBus status LEDs
Remotebus Disabled, remote bus to next InterBus device is
RD (yellow)
switched off.
TR (green) Transmit, data is being transferred from/to participants

76 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


3.2 Technology unit overview

3.2.10 SK TU3-AS1, AS interface


The Actuator-Sensor-Interface (AS interface) is a bus system for the simple
field bus level. The transmission principle is a single master system with
cyclical polling. A maximum of 31 slaves (or 62 A/B slaves) can be operated
on an up to 100m long unshielded two-wire cable in any network structure
(tree/line/star).
The AS interface cable (yellow) transmits data and energy while a second
two-wire cable can be used for a small auxiliary voltage (24V). Addressing is
implemented via the master, which can also provide other management
functions, or via a separate addressing device. The 4 bit reference data (per
direction) are cyclically transmitted with an effective error protection at a
maximum cycle time of 5ms. Transmission of larger data volumes is also
possible with some slave profiles (e.g. slave profile 7.4). The bus system is
defined in the AS Interface Complete Specification.
Detailed information can be found in the operating instructions BU 0090, or
contact the supplier of the frequency inverter.
Device S/E (red/green) Module status/error
Status LEDs
AS- Int. PWR/FLT (red/green) Standard status display for AS interface slaves
OUT 1 … 2 (yellow) Status of the AS interface bits, which are received/transmitted
Digital I/O LEDs
IN 1 ... 4 (yellow) from the Master.

DI 1 ... 4 (yellow)
AS-i I/O LEDs Status at digital input/output.
DO 1 ... 4 (yellow)

3.2.11 PotentiometerBox, SK TU3-POT


The frequency inverter can be controlled directly from the device using the
PotentiometerBox. No additional external components are required.
The motor can be started, stopped and the direction of rotation changed by
means of the buttons. The LEDs indicate the status of the inverter.
The required setpoint value of the frequency is adjusted with the
potentiometer after it has been enabled (green button).
If an inactive error of the frequency inverter is present (red LED flashing),
this can be acknowledged by pressing the STOP key
Note: The PotentiometerBox must be activated via parameter P549
“PotentiometerBox Function” using the setting {4} “Frequency
addition”.

I/O key START/STOP (green/red) To enable or block the output signal.


Potentiometer 0…100% Sets the output frequency beween fmin (P104) and fmax (P105).

Red LED off No error

flashing Inactive error

on Active error

Frequency inverter switched off, enabled with rotation


Green LED off
direction to the right
Frequency inverter switched off, enabled with rotation
flashing 1: briefly on, longer period off
direction to the left

flashing 2: briefly on, briefly off Inverter switched on with direction of rotation to the left

on Inverter switched on with direction of rotation to the right

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 77


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

4 Commissioning
Once the voltage supply has been connected to the frequency inverter, it will be operational after a few
moments. In this state, the frequency inverter can be set to the requirements of the application, i.e. it can be
configured. A completely comprehensive description of all the parameters is set out in Section 5.
The connected motor may only be started after the parameters specific to the application in question have
been set by qualified personnel.
ATTENTION
DANGER TO LIFE!
The frequency inverter is not equipped with a line master switch and is therefore
always live when connected to the power supply. Live voltages may therefore be
connected to a connected motor at standstill.

4.1 Factory settings


All frequency inverters supplied by Getriebebau NORD are pre-programmed with the default setting for
standard applications with 4 pole standard motors (same voltage and power). For use with motors with other
powers or number of poles, the data from the rating plate of the motor must be input into the parameters
P201...P207 under the menu item >Motor data< <.

NOTE: All motor data can be pre-set using the parameter P200. After use of this function has been
successful, this parameter is reset to 0 = no change! The data is loaded automatically into
parameters P201...P209 – and can be compared again with the data on the motor rating plate.

P2 00 Motor list:
0= no chang es 8 = 0.37kW 400V
1= no motor 9 = 0.50P S 460V
2= 0 .25 kW 23 0V 10 = 0.55 kW 230 V
3= 0 .33 PS 23 0V 11 = 0.75 PS 230 V
4= 0 .25 kW 40 0V 12 = 0.55 kW 400 V
5= 0 .33 PS 46 0V 13 = 0.75 PS 460 V
6= 0 .37 kW 23 0V 14 = 0.75 kW 230 V
7= 0 .50 PS 23 0V ....

P204 P207 P200

3~ Mo t
IEC 5 6 E N6003 4
IM B3
IP 55 Rot. KL 16 Th.Cl.F

P201 50 Hz 230 / 4 00 V /Y 60 Hz 460 V Y


9 ,0 / 5,2 A 5,2 A
2 ,2 kW 2,5 kW
P206 c os  0,74 cos 0,74
14 40 /mi n 1 765 /min

P203 P202

RECOMMENDATION: For the correct operation of the drive unit, it is necessary to input the motor data (rating
plate) as precisely as possible. In particular, an automatic stator resistance
measurement using parameter P220 is recommended.
In order to automatically determine the stator resistance, set P220 = 1 and confirm by
pressing "ENTER". The value calculated for the line resistance (dependent upon
P207) will be saved in P208.

78 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


4 Commissioning

4.2 Minimum configuration of control connections


If the frequency inverter is to be controlled via the digital and analog inputs, this can be implemented
immediately in the condition as delivered. Settings are not necessary for the moment.

Minimum circuitry

VO 10V 11
12 Potentiometer, 10kOhm
GND/0V
AIN 1 14 R = 10k (Function P400 = 1)
16 (min./max. range P104/105)
17
DIN 1 21
22 Switch, ON/OFF
23 (Function P420 = 1)
24
25
*Devices SK5x5E:
VO 15V 42 Terminal designation 44 instead of 42:
40 Size 1 – 4: 18V … 30V (according to input voltage VI)
41 Size 5 – 6: VO = 24V ± 25%

Basic parameters
If the current setting of the frequency inverter is not known, loading the default setting is recommended 
P523 = 1. The inverter is pre-programmed for standard applications in this configuration. If necessary, the
following parameters can be adjusted with the optional SimpleBox SK CSX-0 or ControlBox TY3-CTR:

O perating values
display (or operational)
following mains ON
P7- -
_ _ _ _ Inform ation
P5 - -
Additional param .

P0 - - P5 2 3
Display parameters P4 - - =1

P1- -
Load default data

Basic param eters


P2 - - Control terminals

Motor data

P4 0 0
P10 2
actual output frequency

Function analog input


0...10V -frequency-
Acceleration tim e
As standard the

0 ... 320s
is displayed

See 4.1 Default settings

P4 2 0
Motor data

P10 3 Funct. Digital input 1


- O N right -
Deceleration tim e
0 ... 320s

P10 4
M in. frequency
0 ... 400Hz

P10 5
M ax. frequency
0.1 ... 400Hz

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 79


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

4.3 KTY84-130 Connection (software version 1.7 and above)


The current vector regulation of the SK 500E series can be further optimised by the use of a KTY84-130
temperature sensor (Rth(0°C)=500, Rth(100°C)=1000). In particular there is the advantage that after an
intermediate mains switch-off during operation the temperature of the motor is measured directly and therefore
the actual value is always available to the frequency inverter. With this, the regulator can always achieve an
optimum precision of speed.

Connections (Analog input 2)


RV = 2,7 kOhm
VO 10V 11
KTY84-130
GND/0V 12 -1R2 +1R1
X4 14
AIN 2 16
17

Parameter settings (Analog input 2)


The following parameters must be set for the function of the KTY84-130.
1. The motor data P201-P207 must be set according to the rating plate.
2. The motor stator resistance P208 is determined at 20°C with P220=1.
3. Function analog input 2, P405=48 (Motor temperature)
4. The mode for analog input 2, P406=1 (negative temperatures are also measured)
5. Adjustment of analog input 2: P407=1,54V and P408=2,64V (for RV= 2.7 kOhm)
6. Adjust time constants: P409=400ms (Filter time constant is a maximum)
7. Motor temperature control: P001=23 (Temperature display, operation display SK TU3-CTR / SK CSX-0

P7- -
_ _ _ _ Inform ation P5 - -
Additional
pa ram e te rs

P0 - - P4 - -
D isp la y p ara m eters
P1- - P2 - -
Contro l term inals

Ba sic p a ram e te rs
M ot or d a ta

P0 0 1 P4 0 5
M o tor te m pe rature An alo g in pu t fu nctio n 2
-50 ... 1 5 0°C
P2 0 1 P4 0 5=4 8 (M oto r t em p .)
N om ina l motor freq .
1 0 ... 40 0 Hz

P40 6
bis

M o de a na log inp u t 2

P2 0 7 P40 6 =1 (0 ...10 V)

M otor switch in g
Sta r/de lta
Note
P40 7
1. Excess temperature of the motor is also monitored Ad just. a na log inp u t 2

P2 0 8
P40 7 =1,5 4 V
and at 155°C (switching threshold for the
thermistor) causes the drive unit to shut down with Stator resista nce
0 … 3 00 
error message E002. P4 0 8
Ad just. a na log inp u t 2
2. To determine the stator resistance of the motor, P40 8 =2,6 4 V
the temperature range 15… 25°C should not be P2 2 0
Para m eter id en tificatio n
exceeded. P2 20=1 / 2
P40 9
An alog in pu t filte r 2
P40 9 =4 0 0m s

80 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


4 Commissioning

4.4 Frequency addition and subtraction via operating boxes


(Software version 1.7 and above)

If the parameter P549 (PotentiometerBox Function) is set to 4 “Frequency addition” or 5 “Frequency


subtraction”, a value can be added or subtracted via the value keys or with the ControlBox or the
ParameterBox.
If the ENTER key is confirmed, the value is saved in P113. The next time the device is started, the value
will be added or subtracted immediately.
As soon as the inverter is enabled, the ControlBox switches to the operating display. With the ParameterBox, a
change of value can only be made in the operating display. If the ControlBox is enabled, parameterisation is no
longer possible. Enabling via the ControlBox or ParameterBox is also no longer possible in this mode, even if
P509 = 0 and P510 = 0.

Note: In order to safely activate the ParameterBox in this mode, the STOP key must be pressed
once.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 81


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

5 Parameterisation
Every frequency inverter is factory-set for a motor of the same power. All parameters can be adjusted "online".
There are four switchable parameter sets available during operation. As delivered, all parameters are visible;
however, some can be hidden with parameter P003.

NOTE: As there are dependencies between parameters, it is possible for invalid internal data and
operating faults to be generated briefly. Only the inactive or non-critical parameter sets should be
adjusted during operation.

The individual parameters are combined in various parameter sets. The first digit of the parameter number
indicates the assignment to a Menu Group.

Menu group No. Master function

Operating displays (P0--): For the selection of the physical units of the display value.

Basic parameters (P1--): Contain the basic inverter settings, e.g. switch on and switch off
procedures and, along with the motor data, are sufficient for standard
applications.

Motor data (P2--): Settings for the motor-specific data, important for ISD current control,
and selection of characteristic curve during the setting of dynamic
and static boost.

Control parameters (P3--): Settings for the control parameters (current controller, speed
controller etc.) with speed feedback in SK 520E/53xE.
(only with SK 520E/53xE)

Control terminals (P4--): Analog input and output scaling, specification of digital input and
relay output functions, as well as PID controller parameters.

Additional parameters (P5--): Functions dealing with e.g. the interface, pulse frequency or error
acknowledgement.

Positioning (P6--): Adjustment of the positioning function in SK 53xE. Additional


information is contained in the manual BU 0510.
(only with SK 53xE)

Information (P7--): Display of e.g. actual operating values, old error messages,
equipment status reports or software version.

Array parameter: -01 Some parameters in these groups can be programmed and read in
... several levels (arrays). After the parameter is selected, the array level
-xx must also be selected.

NOTE: Parameter P523 can be used to load the factory settings for all parameters at any time. This can
be helpful, e.g. during the commissioning of a frequency inverter whose parameters no longer
correspond with the factory settings.

ATTENTION
All parameter settings will be lost, if P523= 1 is set and confirmed with "ENTER".
To safeguard the actual parameter settings, these can be transferred to the
ControlBox (P550=1) or ParameterBox memories

82 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5 Parameterisation

Availability of the parameters


Due to certain configurations, the parameters are subject to certain conditions. The following tables (from
Section. 5.1 onwards) list all parameters together with the particular information.

Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor Parameter set


P000 … - 01
example

… - 02 Operating parameter display 520E S P


...
0.01 ... 9999 In the display of the SimpleBox (SK CSX-0) or the ControlBox (SK TU3-CTR, the operating
[0] value selected in parameter P001 is displayed online.
Information about the operating status of the drive can be read out as required.

Parameter Text

Array values

Parameter number

Parameter value range

Factory settings of parameter

Only available with types > SK 500E

Supervisor parameters (S) are dependent


on the settings in P003

Parameter selection in P100 dependent


on the parameter set

Array parameter display


Some parameters have the option of displaying settings and views in several
levels (arrays). After the parameter is selected, the array level is displayed and ParameterBox SK TU3-PAR
must then also be selected.
If the ControlBox is used, the array level is shown by _ - 0 1 . With the
ParameterBox (picture on right) the selection options for the array level appear
at the top left of the display.

For parameterisation with ControlBox SK TU3-CTR:

Setting:
P5 0 2 EN T ER
P_ 0 1 E NT E R
of f Value of leading function 1

VA L U E

Setting:
P_ 0 2 E NT E R
of f Value of leading function 2

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 83


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

5.1 Operating display


Abbreviations used: FI = Frequency inverter
SW = Software version, stored in P707.
S = Supervisor parameters are visible or hidden dependent on P003.

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P000 Operating parameter display


0.01 ... 9999 In the display of the SimpleBox (SK CSX-0) or the ControlBox (SK TU3-CTR, the operating value
selected in parameter P001 is displayed online.
Information about the operating status of the drive can be read out as required.

P001 Select of display


0 ... 65 1 = Actual frequency [Hz]: the current output frequency being supplied by the FI.
[0] 2 = Rotation speed [1/min]: the current rotation speed as calculated by the FI.
3 = Set frequency [Hz]: the output frequency equivalent to the actual setpoint. This need not
match the actual output frequency.
4 = Current [A]: the actual output current measured by the FI.
5 = Torque current [A]: the torque developing output current of the FI.
6 = Voltage [Vac]: the actual alternating voltage being output by the FI.
7 = Link voltage [Vdc]: the FI-internal DC voltage. Amongst other things, this depends on the
level of the mains voltage.
8 = cos : the current calculated value of the power factor.
9 = Apparent power [kVA]: the current apparent power calculated by the FI.
10 = Effective power [kW]: the current effective power calculated by the FI.
11 = Torque [%]: the current torque calculated by the FI.
12 = Field [%]: the current field in the motor calculated by the FI.
13 = Operating hours: time that voltage is applied to the FI network.
14 = Operating hours enabled: time the FI is enabled.
15 = Analog input 1 [%]: current value present at analog input 1 of the FI.
16 = Analog input 2 [%]: current value present at analog input 2 of the FI.
17 = ... 18 reserved for SK 530E  BU 0510
19 = Heat sink temperature [°C]: current temperature of the FI heat sink.
20 = Motor load [%]: average motor load, based on the known motor data (P201...P209).
21 = Braking resistor load [%]: average braking resistor load, based on the known
resistance data (P556...P557).
22 = reserved
23 = Motor temperature, measured via KTY-84. Details in Section 4.3
24 = ... 29 reserved for SK 530E  BU 0510
30 = Current nominal value MP-S [Hz]: current nominal value of the motor potentiometer
function (saved) (P420…P426=71/72). The nominal value can be read out with this function
or pre-set (without the drive running).
31 = …65 reserved for SK 530E  BU 0510

84 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.1 Operating display

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P002 Display factor S

0.01 ... 999.99 The selected operating value in parameter P001 >Select of display< is multiplied with the scaling
factor in P000 and displayed in >Operating parameter display<.
[ 1.00 ]
It is therefore possible to display system-specific operating such as e.g. the throughput quantity

P003 Supervisor code


0 ... 9999 0 = The Supervisor parameters are not visible.
[1] 1 = All parameters are visible.
2 = Only the menu group 0 > Operating display< (P001 … P003) is visible.
3 = ... 9999, as for setting value 2.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 85


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

5.2 Basic parameters

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P100 Parameter set S

0 ... 3 Selection of the parameters sets to be parameterised. Four parameters sets are available. All
parameter set-dependent parameters are identified by P.
[0]
The selection of the operating parameter set is performed via a digital input or the Bus control.
Switching can take place during operation (online).

Digital input Digital input LEDs


Setting
function [8] function [17] ControlBox
1
0 = Parameter set 1 LOW LOW
2

1
1 = Parameter set 2 HIGH LOW
2

2 = Parameter set 3 LOW HIGH 2

1
3 = Parameter set 4 HIGH HIGH
2

If enabled via the keyboard (ControlBox, PotentiometerBox or ParameterBox), the operating


parameter set will match the settings in P100.

P101 Copy parameter set S

0 ... 4 After confirmation with the ENTER key, a copy of the parameter set selected in P100 >Parameter
set< is written to the parameter set dependent on the value selected here
[0]
0 = Do not copy
1 = Copies the active parameter set to parameter set 1
2 = Copies the active parameter set to parameter set 2
3 = Copies the active parameter set to parameter set 3
4 = Copies the active parameter set to parameter set 4

P102 Acceleration time P

0 ... 320.00 s Acceleration time is the time corresponding to the linear frequency rise from 0Hz to the set
maximum frequency (P105). If an actual setpoint of <100% is being used, the acceleration time is
[ 2.00 ] reduced linearly according to the setpoint set.
The acceleration time can be extended by certain circumstances, e.g. FI overload, setpoint lag,
smoothing, or if the current limit is reached.

P103 Deceleration time P

0 ... 320.00 s Deceleration time is the time corresponding to the linear frequency reduction from the set
maximum frequency (P105) to 0Hz. If a current nominal value <100% is used, the deceleration
[ 2.00 ] time reduces accordingly.
The deceleration time can be extended by certain circumstances, e.g. by the selected >Switch-off
mode< (P108) or >Ramp smoothing< (P106).

86 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.2 Basic parameters

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P104 Minimum frequency P

0.0 ... 400.0 Hz The minimum frequency is the frequency supplied by the FI as soon as it is enabled and no
additional setpoint is set.
[ 0.0 ]
In combination with other setpoints (e.g. analog setpoint of fixed frequencies) these are added to
the set minimum frequency.
This frequency is undershot when
a. the drive is accelerated from standstill.
b. the FI is blocked. The frequency then reduces to the absolute minimum (P505) before
it is blocked.
c. the FI is reversing. The reverse in the rotation field takes place at the absolute
minimum frequency (P505).
This frequency can be continuously undershot if, during acceleration or braking, the function
"Maintain frequency" (Function Digital input = 9) is executed.

P105 Maximum frequency P

0.1 ... 400.0 Hz The frequency supplied by the FI after being enabled and once the maximum setpoint is present,
e.g. analog setpoint as per P403, a correspondingly fixed frequency or maximum via the
[ 50.0 ] ControlBox.
This frequency can only be overshot by the slip compensation (P212), the function "Maintain
frequency" (function digital input = 9) or a change to another parameter set with lower maximum
frequency.

P106 Ramp smoothing S P

0 ... 100 % This parameter enables a smoothing of the acceleration and braking ramps. This is necessary for
applications where gentle, but dynamic speed change is important.
[0]
Ramp smoothing is carried out for every setpoint change.
The value to be set is based on the set acceleration and deceleration time, however values <10%
have no effect.
The following then applies for the entire acceleration or deceleration time, including rounding:

P106 %
t tot ACCELERATION TIME  tP102  tP102 
100%
P106 %
t tot DECELERATION TIME  tP103  tP103 
100%

Currently Currently
Output
10 – 100% from P102 10 – 100% from P103
frequency

Setpoint
frequency

P102 P103 Time

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 87


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P107 Brake reaction time P

0 ... 2.50 s Electromagnetic brakes have a physically-dependent delayed reaction time when applied. This
can cause a dropping of the load for lifting applications, as the brake only takes over the load after
[ 0.00 ] a delay.
This reaction time can be taken into account under parameter P107 (Braking control).
Within the adjustable application time, the FI supplies the set absolute minimum frequency (P505)
and so prevents movement against the brake and load drop when stopping.
See also the parameter >Release time< P114
NOTE: For the control of electromagnetic braking (especially for lifting operations) an
internal relay should be used, see Function 1, external brake (P434/441). The
minimum absolute frequency (P505) should never be less than 2.0Hz.
NOTE: If a time > 0 is set in P107 or P114, at the moment the FI is switched on, the level
of the excitation current (field current) is checked. If no megnetising current is
present, the FI remains in magnetising mode and the motor brake is not released.
In order to achieve a shut-down and an error message (E016) in this case,
P539 must be set to 2 or 3.

Recommendation for applications:


Lifting equipment with brake, without speed
P114 = 0.2...0.3sec.
Output
P107 = 0.2...0.3sec. frequency
P201…P208 = Motor data Signal IN Signal OUT

P434 = 1 (ext. brake)


P505 = 2...4Hz

for safe start-up


P505
P112 = 401 (off)
P536 = 2.1 (off)
P537 = 201 (off) Brake ventilated Time
P539 = 2/3 (ISD monitoring)
P114 P107
or
against load drops P107, if P114 = 0
P214 = 50...100% (precontrol)

88 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.2 Basic parameters

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P108 Disconnection mode S P

0 ... 12 This parameter determines the manner in which the output frequency is reduced after "Blocking"
(controller enable  low).
[1]
0 = Voltage block: The output signal is switched off immediately. The FI no longer supplies
an output frequency. In this case, the motor is braked only by mechanical friction.
Immediately switching the FI on again can lead to an error message.
1 = Ramp: The current output frequency is reduced in proportion to the remaining
deceleration time, from P103/P105.
2 = Ramp with delay: as with ramp, however for generational operation the brake ramp is
extended, or for static operation the output frequency is increased. Under certain
conditions, this function can prevent overload switch off or reduce brake resistance
power dissipation.
NOTE: This function must not be programmed if defined deceleration is required,
e.g. with lifting mechanisms.
3 = Immediate DC braking: The FI switches immediately to the preselected DC current
(P109). This DC current is supplied for the remaining proportion of the >DC brake time<
(P110). Depending on the relationship, actual output frequency to max. quency (P105),
the >DC braking time< is shortened. The time taken for the motor to stop depends on the
application. The time taken to stop depends on the mass inertia of the load and the DC
current set (P109).
With this type of braking, no energy is returned to the FI; heat loss occurs mainly in the
motor rotor.
4 = Constant braking distance: The brake ramp is delayed in starting if the equipment is
not being driven at the maximum output frequency (P105). This results in an
approximately similar braking distance for different frequencies.
NOTE: This function cannot be used as a positioning function. This function should
not be combined with ramp smoothing (P106).
5 = Combined braking: Dependent on the actual link voltage, a high frequency voltage is
switched to the basic frequency (linear characteristic curves only, P211 = 0 and P212 =
0). The deceleration time is retained where possible (P103).  additional motor warming!
6 = Quadratic ramp: The brake ramp does not follow a linear path, but rather a decreasing
quadratic one.
7 = Quadratic ramp with delay: Combination of functions 2 and 6
8 = Quadratic combined braking: Combination of functions 5 and 6
9 = Constant acceleration power: Only applies in field weakening range! The drive is
accelerated or braked using constant electrical power. The course of the ramps depends
on the load.
10 = Distance calculator: Constant distance between current frequency / speed and the set
minimum output frequency (P104).
11 = Constant acceleration power with delay: Combination of functions 2 and 9.
12 = Constant acceleration power with delay (as 11) with additional brake chopper
support
13 = Ramp with switch-off delay As for -1- ramp, however, after enabling has been
removed, the drive unit remains at the set absolute minimum frequency (P505) for the
time set in parameter P110 before the brake is applied and the usual braking procedure
comes into effect.
Application example: Re-positioning for crane control (Software version 1.7 R0 or higher)

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 89


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P109 DC brake current S P

0 ... 250 % Current setting for the functions of DC current braking (P108 = 3) and combined braking (P108 = 5).
[ 100 ] The correct setting value depends on the mechanical load and the required deceleration time. A
higher setting brings large loads to a standstill more quickly.
The 100% setting relates to a current value as stored in the >Nominal current< parameter P203.
NOTE: The amount of DC current (0Hz) which the FI can supply is limited. For this value,
plese refer to the table in Section 8.5.3, column: 0Hz. In the basic setting this limiting
value is about 110%.

P110 Time DC brake on S P

0.00 ... 60.00 s The time during which the motor has the current selected in parameter >DC brake current<
applied to it during the DC braking functions (P108 = 3).
[ 2.00 ]
Depending on the relationship, actual output frequency to max. quency (P105), the >Time DC
brake on< is shortened.
The time starts running with the removal of the enable and can be interrupted by fresh enabling.

P111 P factor torque limit S P

25 ... 400 % Directly affects the behaviour of the drive at torque limit. The basic setting of 100% is sufficient for
most drive tasks.
[ 100 ]
If values are too high the drive tends to vibrate as it reaches the torque limit.
If values are too low, the programmed torque limit can be exceeded .

P112 Torque current limit S P

25 ... 400 % / 401 With this parameter, a limit value for the torque generating current can be set. This can prevent
mechanical overloading of the drive. It cannot provide any protection against mechanical
[ 401 ] obstruction (movement to stops). A slipping clutch which acts as a safety device must be
provided.
The torque current limit can also be set over an infinite range of settings using an analog input.
The maximum setpoint (compare adjustment 100%, P403/P408) then corresponds to the value
set in P112.
The limit value 20% of torque current cannot be undershot by a smaller analog setpoint
(P400/405 = 2) (in servo mode with P300 = 1, not below 10%)!
401 = OFF means the switch-off of the torque current limit! This is also the basic setting for the FI.
Note: For lifting gear applications, a torque limit must not be used!

P113 Jog frequency S P

-400.0 ... 400.0 Hz When using the ControlBox or ParameterBox to control the FI, the jog frequency is the initial
value following successful enabling.
[ 0.0 ]
Alternatively, when control is via the control terminals, the jog frequency can be activated via one
Change of function of the digital inputs.
as of software
version 1.7 The setting of the jog frequency can be done directly via this parameter or, if the FI is enabled via
the keyboard, by pressing the ENTER key. In this case, the actual output frequency is set in
parameter P113 and is then available for the next start.
NOTES: Software version V1.7 R0 and higher:
The activation of the jog frequency via one of the digital inputs causes the remote
control to be switched off in case of bus operation. In addition, any setpoint
frequencies present are not taken into account.
Exception: analog setpoint values which are processed via the functions Frequency
addition or Frequency subtraction.
Up to software version V1.6 R1:
Specified setpoints via the control terminals, e.g. jog frequency, fixed frequencies or
analog setpoints, are generally added with the correct sign. The set maximum
frequency (P105) cannot be exceeded, and the minimum frequency (P104) cannot
be undershot.

90 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.2 Basic parameters

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P114 Brake ventilation time S P

0 ... 2.50 s Electromagnetic brakes have a delayed reaction time during release, which depends on physical
factors. This can lead to the motor running while the brake is still applied, which will cause the
[ 0.00 ] inverter to switch off with an overcurrent report.
This release time can be taken into account in parameter P114 (Braking control ).
During the adjustable release time, the FI supplies the set absolute minimum frequency (P505)
thus preventing movement against the brake.
See also the parameter >Brake reaction time< P107 (setting example).
NOTE: If the brake ventilation time is set to "0", then P107 is the brake release and
application time.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 91


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

5.3 Motor / characteristic curve parameters

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P200 Motor list P

0 ... 53 The factory settings for the motor data can be edited with this parameter. The factory setting in
parameters P201...P209 is a 4-pole DS standard motor with the nominal FI power setting.
[0]
By selecting one of the possible digits and pressing the ENTER key, all motor parameters
(P201…P209) are adjusted to the selected standard power. The basis for the motor data is a 4-
pole DS standard motor
0 = No change to data
1 = No motor: In this setting, the FI operates without current control, slip compensation and
pre-magnetising time, and is therefore not recommended for motor applications. Possible
applications are induction furnaces or other applications with coils and transformers. The
following motor data is set here: 50.0Hz / 1500rpm / 15.0A / 400V / 0.00kW / cos =0.90
/ Star / RS 0,01 / IEMPTY 6.5A

2= 0.25kW 230V 14 = 0.75kW 230V 26 = 2.2 kW 230V 40 = 7.5 kW 230V


3= 0.33HP = 230V 15 = 1.0 HP 230V 27 = 3.0 HP 230V 41 = 10.0 HP 230V
4= 0.25kW 400V 16 = 0.75kW 400V 28 = 2.2 kW 400V 42 = 7.5 kW 400V
5= 0.33HP = 460V 17 = 1.0 HP 460V 29 = 3.0 HP 460V 43 = 10.0 HP 460V
6= 0.37kW 230V 18 = 1.1 kW 230V 30 = 3.0 kW 230V 44 = 11.0 kW 400V
7= 0.50HP = 230V 19 = 1.5 HP 230V 31 = 3.0 kW 400V 45 = 15.0 HP 460V
8= 0.37kW 400V 20 = 1.1 kW 400V 32 = 4.0 kW 230V 46 = 15.0 kW 400V
9= 0.50HP = 460V 21 = 1.5 HP 460V 33 = 5.0 HP 230V 47 = 20.0 HP 460V
10 = 0.55kW 230V 22 = 1.5 kW 230V 34 = 4.0 kW 400V 48 = 18.5 kW 400V
11 = 0.75HP 230V 23 = 2.0 HP 230V 35 = 5.0 HP 460V 49 = 25.0 HP 460V
12 = 0.55kW 400V 24 = 1.5 kW 400V 36 = 5.5 kW 230V 50 = 22.0 kW 400V
13 = 0.75HP 460V 25 = 2.0 HP 460V 37 = 7.5 HP 230V 51 = 30.0 HP 460V
38 = 5.5 kW 400V 52 = 30.0 kW 400V
39 = 7.5 HP 460V 53 = 40.0 HP 460V

NOTE: As P200 returns to = 0 after the input confirmation, the control of the set motor can
be implemented via parameter P205.

P201 Nominal motor frequency S P

10.0 ... 400.0 Hz The motor nominal frequency determines the rev/f break point at which the FI supplies the
[ 
] nominal frequency (P204) at the output.

P202 Nominal motor speed S P

150 ... 24000 rpm The nominal motor speed is important for the correct calculation and control of the motor slip and
[***] the speed display (P001 = 1).

***These settings are dependent on the nominal power of the FI or the selection in parameter P200.

92 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.3 Motor / characteristic curve parameters

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P203 Nominal motor current S P

0.1 ... 300.0 A


The nominal motor current is a decisive parameter for the current vector control.
[***]

P204 Nominal motor voltage S P

100 ... 800 V The >Nominal voltage< matches the mains voltage to the motor voltage. In combination with the
[ 
] nominal frequency, the voltage/frequency characteristic curve is produced.

P205 Nominal motor power P

0.00 ... 150.00 kW


The motor nominal power controls the motor set via P200.
[***]

P206 Motor cos  S P

0.50 ... 0.90


The motor cos  is a decisive parameter for the current vector control.
[***]

P207 Motor circuit S P

0 ... 1 0 = Star 1 = Delta


***
[ ] The motor circuit is decisive for stator resistance measurement (P220) and therefore for current
vector control.

P208 Stator resistance S P

0.00 ... 300.00  Motor stator resistance restistance of a phase winding with a DC motor.
***
[ ] Has a direct influence on the current control of the FI. Too high a value will lead to a possible
overcurrent; too low a value to a motor torque that is too low.
The parameter P220 can be used for simple measurement. Parameter P208 can be used for
manual setting or as information about the result of an automatic measurement.
NOTE: For optimum functioning of the current vector control, the stator resistance must be
automatically measured by the FI.

P209 No load current S P

0.1 ... 300.0 A This value is always calculated automatically from the motor data if there is a change in the
*** parameter >cos < and the parameter >Nominal current<.
[ ]
NOTE: If the value is to be entered directly, then it must be set as the last motor data. This
is the only way to ensure that the value will not be overwritten.

P210 Static boost S P

0 ... 400 % The static boost affects the current that generates the magnetic field. This is equivalent to the no
load current of the respective motor and is therefore load-independent. The no load current is
[ 100 ] calculated using the motor data. The factory setting of 100% is sufficient for normal applications.


These settings are dependent on the nominal power of the FI or the selection in parameter P200.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 93


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P211 Dynamic boost S P

0 ... 150 % The dynamic boost affects the torque generating current and is therefore a load-dependent
parameter. The factory 100% setting is also sufficient for typical applications.
[ 100 ]
Too high a value can lead to overcurrent in the FI. Under load therefore, the output voltage will be
raised too sharply. Too low a value will lead to insufficient torque.

P212 Slip compensation S P

0 ... 150 % The slip compensation increases the output frequency, dependent on load, to keep the DC
asynchronous motor speed approximately constant.
[ 100 ]
The factory setting of 100% is optimal when using DC asynchronous motors and correct motor
data has been set.
If several motors (different loads or outputs) are operated with one FI, the slip compensation P212
must be set to 0%. This rules out a negative influence. This is equally valid for synchronous
motors that do not have slip due to their design.

P213 ISD control loop gain S P

25 ... 400 % This parameter influences the control dynamics of the FI current vector control (ISD control).
Higher settings make the controller faster, lower settings slower.
[ 100 ]
Dependent on application type, this parameter can be altered, e.g. to avoid unstable operation

P214 Torque precontrol S P

-200 ... 200 % This function allows a value for the expected torque requirement to be set in the controller. This
function can be used in lifting applications for a better load transfer during start-up.
[0]
NOTE: Motor torques (with rotation field R) are entered with a positive sign, generator
torques (with rotation field L) are entered with a negative sign. The reverse applies
for the counter clockwise rotation.

P215 Boost precontrol S P

0 ... 200 % Only with linear characteristic curve (P211 = 0% and P212 = 0%).
[0] For drives that require a high starting torque, this parameter provides an option for switching in an
additional current during the start phase. The application time is limited and can be selected at
parameter >Time boost precontrol< P216.
All current and torque current limits that may have been set (P112 and P536, P537) are
deactivated during the boost lead time.

P216 Time boost precontrol S P

0.0 ... 10.0 s Only with linear characteristic curve (P211 = 0% and P212 = 0%).
[0] Application time for increased starting current.

94 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.3 Motor / characteristic curve parameters

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P217 Oscillation damping S P

0 ... 400 % With the oscillation damping, idling current harmonics can be damped. Parameter 217 is a
measure of the damping power.
[ 10 ]
For oscillation damping the oscillation component is filtered out of the torque current by means of
SW1.6 and above a high pass filter. This is amplified by P217, inverted and switched to the output frequency.
The limit for the value switched is also proportional to P217. The time constant for the high pass
filter depends on P213. For higher values of P213 the time constant is lower.
With a set value of 10% for P217, a maximum of ± 0.045Hz are switched in. At 400% in P217,
this corresponds to ± 1.8Hz
The function is not active in “Servo mode, P300”.

P218 Modulation depth S

50 ... 110 % This setting influences the maximum possible output voltage of the FI in relation to the mains
voltage. Values <100% reduce the voltage to values below that of the mains voltage if this is
[ 100 ] required for motors. Values >100% increase the output voltage to the motor increased the
from SW1.5 and harmonics in the current, which may cause swinging in some motors.
above Normally, 100% should be set.

P219 Automatic magnetizing adjustment S

25 ... 100 % / 101 With this parameter, an automatic adjustment of the magnetizing to the motor load can be made.
P219 is a limiting value, to which the field in the motor can be reduced.
[ 100 ]
As standard, the value is set to 100%, and therefore no reduction is possible. As minimum, 25%
SW1.6 and above can be set.
The reduction of the field is performed with a time constant of approx. 7.5 sec. On increase of
load the field is built up again with a time constant of approx. 300 ms. The reduction of the field is
carried out so that the magnetisation current and the torque current are approximately equal, so
that the motor is operated with “optimum efficiency”. An increase of the field above the setpoint
value is not intended.
This function is intended for applications in which the required torque only changes slowly (e.g.
pumps and fans). Its effect therefore replaces a quadratic curve, as it adapts the voltage to the
load.
NOTE: This must not be used for lifting or applications where a more rapid build-up of the
torque is required, as otherwise there would be overcurrent switch-offs or inversion
of the motor on sudden changes of load, because the missing field would have be
compensated by a disproportionate torque current.
101 = automatic, with the setting P219=101 an automatic magnetisation current controller is
activated. The ISD controller then operates with a subordinate magnetizing
controller, which improves the slippage calculation, especially at higher loads. The
control tomes are considerably faster compared to the Normal ISD control (P219 =
100)

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 95


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P2xx Control/characteristic curve parameters


Output
voltage

P204

P211

P215
P210

Output frequency
P201
NOTE:
P216 Time
"typical"
Settings for the... Current vector control (factory setting) Linear rev./f. characteristic curve
P201 to P209 = Motor data P201 to P209 = Motor data
P210 = 100% P210 = 100% (static boost)
P211 = 100% P211 = 0%
P212 = 100% P212 = 0%
P213 = 100% P213 = no significance
P214 = 0% P214 = no significance
P215 = no significance P215 = 0% (dynamic boost)
P216 = no significance P216 = 0s (time dyn. boost)

96 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.3 Motor / characteristic curve parameters

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P220 Parameter identification P

... up to 240s The motor data is automatically determined by the FI with this parameter. In most cases this leads
to considerably better drive characteristics, as DC asynchronous motors are subject to
[0] manufacturing tolerances which are not documented on the rating plate.
The identification of all parameters takes some time. Do not switch off the mains voltage during
this time. The identification can only be carried out in an “operative” condition. This must be
particularly taken into account in BUS operation.
If unfavourable operating characteristics result, select a suitable motor in P200 or set the
parameters P201 … P208 manually.
0 = No identification
1 = Identification RS: only the stator resistance (display in P208) is determined by multiple
measurements.
2 = Motor identification: all motor parameters (P202, P203, P206, P208, P209) are
determined.
Procedure: a) The identification should be made with the motor cold. Warming up of the motor during
operation is taken into account.
b) The FI must be in an “operative condition” For BUS operation, the Bus must be operating
without error.
c) The motor power may only be one power level greater or 3 power levels lower than the
nominal power of the FI.
d) The motor data should be set according to the rating plate or P200. However, at least the
nominal frequency (P201), the nominal speed (P202), the voltage (P204), the power (P205)
and the motor circuit (P207) should be known.
e) If the identification cannot be concluded successfully, the error message E019 is generated.
See also Section 6, Error messages.
f) Reliable identification can be made with motor cables up 20m in length.

NOTE: After identification of parameters, P220 is again = 0.


Care must be taken that the connection to the motor is not interrupted during the
entire measuring process.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 97


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

5.4 Control parameters


Only available in SK 520E/53xE with the use of an incremental encoder. Connection, see Section 2.13.

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set
SK 520E
P300 Servo mode and above
P

0 ... 1 This parameter activates speed control with speed measurement via an incremental encoder.
This leads to a very stable speed behaviour up to motor standstill.
[0]
0 = off
1 = on
NOTE: For correct function, an incremental encoder must be connected (see control
connections, Section 2.13 ) and the correct pulse number must be entered in
parameter P301.
SK 520E
P301 Incremental encoder and above
0 ... 17 Input of the pulse-count per rotation of the connected encoder.
[6] If the encoder rotation direction is not the same as the FI, (depending on installation and wiring),
this can be compensated for by selecting the corresponding negative pulse numbers 8...16.
0 = 500 pulses 8 = -500 pulses
1 = 512 pulses 9 = - 512 pulses
2 = 1000 pulses 10 = - 1000 pulses
3 = 1024 pulses 11 = - 1024 pulses
4 = 2000 pulses 12 = - 2000 pulses
5 = 2048 pulses 13 = -2048 pulses
6 = 4096 pulses 14 = -4096 pulses
7 = 5000 pulses 15 = -5000 pulses
16 = -8192 pulses
17 = + 8192 pulses

NOTE: P301 is important for the positioning control in SK 530E If an incremental encoder is
used for positioning (P604=1), the setting of the pulse number is made here. (see
manual BU 0510)
SK 520E
P310 Speed controller P and above
P

0 ... 3200 % P-component of the encoder (proportional amplification).


[ 100 ] Amplification factor, with which the speed difference is multiplied from the setpoint and actual
frequency. A value of 100% means that a speed difference of 10% produces a setpoint of 10%.
Values that are too high can cause the output speed to oscillate.
SK 520E
P311 Speed controller I and above
P

0 ... 800 % / ms I-component of the encoder (Integration component).


[ 20 ] The integration component of the controller completely eliminates any control deviation. The value
indicates how large the setpoint change is per ms. Values that are too small cause the controller
to slow down (reset time is too long).

98 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.4 Control parameters
Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set
SK 520E
P312 Torque current controller P and above
S P

0 ... 800 % Current controller for the torque current. The higher the current controller parameters are set, the
more precisely the current setpoint is maintained. Excessively high values in P312 generally lead
[ 200 ] to high-frequency oscillations at low speeds; on the other hand, excessively high values in P313
generally produce low frequency oscillations across the whole speed range.
If the value "Zero" is entered in P312 and P313, then the torque current control is switched off. In
this case, only the motor model lead is used.
SK 520E
P313 Torque current controller I and above
S P

0 ... 800 % / ms
I-component of the torque current controller. (See also P312 >Torque current controller P<)
[ 125 ]
SK 520E
P314 Torque current controller limit and above
S P

0 ... 400 V Determines the maximum voltage increase of the torque current controller. The higher the value,
the greater the maximum effect that can be exercised by the torque current controller. Excessive
[ 400 ] values in P314 can specifically lead to instability during transition to the field weakening zone (see
P320). The values for P314 and P317 should always be set roughly the same, so that the field
and torque current controllers are balanced.
SK 520E
P315 Field current controller P and above
S P

0 ... 800 % Current controller for the field current. The higher the current controller parameters are set, the
more precisely the current setpoint is maintained. Excessively high values for P315 generally lead
[ 200 ] to high frequency vibrations at low speeds. On the other hand, excessively high values in P316
generally produce low frequency vibrations across the whole speed range If the value "Zero" is
entered in P315 and P316, then the field current controller is switched off. In this case, only the
motor model lead is used.
SK 520E
P316 Field current controller I and above
S P

0 ... 800 % / ms
I-component of the field current controller. See also P315 >Field current controller P<
[ 125 ]
SK 520E
P317 Field current controller limit and above
S P

0 ... 400 V Determines the maximum voltage increase of the torque current controller. The higher the value,
the greater is the maximum effect that can be exercised by the field current controller. Excessive
[ 400 ] values in P317 can specifically lead to instability during transition to the field reduction range (see
P320). The values for P314 and P317 should always be set roughly the same, so that the field
and torque current controllers are balanced.
SK 520E
P318 Weak field control P and above
S P

0 ... 800 % The weak field control reduces the field setpoint when the synchronous speed is exceeded.
Generally, the weak field control has no function; for this reason, the field reduction controller only
[ 150 ] needs to be set if speeds are set above the nominal motor speed. Excessive values for P318 /
P319 will lead to controller oscillations. The field is not reduced sufficiently if the values are too
small or during dynamic acceleration and/or delay times. The downstream current controller can
no longer read the current setpoint.
SK 520E
P319 Weak field control I and above
S P

0 ... 800 % / ms
[ 20 ] Affects only the field reduction range, see P318 >Field reduction controller P<

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 99


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set
SK 520E
P320 Weak field control limit and above
S P

0 ... 110 % The weak field limit determines at which speed / current the controller will begin to weaken the
field. At a set value of 100% the controller will begin to reduce the field at approximately the
[ 100 ] synchronous speed.
If values much larger than the standard values have been set in P314 and/or P317, then the field
weak limit should be correspondingly reduced, so that the control range is actually available to the
current controller.
SK 520E
P321 Speed control I brake off and above
S P

0 ... 4 During brake ventilation time (P107/P114), the I-component of the rotation speed control is
increased. This leads to better load take-up, especially with vertical movements.
[0]
0 = P311 x 1
1 = P311 x 2 3 = P311 x 8
2 = P311 x 4 4 = P311 x 16
SK 520E
P325 Encoder function and above
0 ... 4 The actual speed list value supplied by an incremental encoder to the FI can be used for various
functions in the FI.
[0]
0 = Rotation speed measurement Servo mode: The actual motor speed list value is used
for the FI servo mode. The ISD control cannot be switched off in this function.
1 = PID actual frequency value: The actual rotation speed of a system is used for rotation
speed control. This function can also be used for controlling a motor with a linear
characteristic curve. It is also possible to use an incremental encoder for speed control
that is not mounted directly onto the motor. P413 – P416 determine the control.
2 = Frequency addition: The rotation speed deduced is added to the current setpoint value.
3 = Frequency subtraction: The determined speed is subtracted from the actual setpoint.
4 = Maximum frequency: The maximum possible output frequency / speed is limited by the
speed of the encoder.

SK 520E
P326 Encoder transformation ratio and above
0.01 ... 100.0 If the incremental encoder is not mounted directly onto the motor shaft, then the respectively
correct transformation ratio of motor speed to encoder speed must be set.
[ 1.00 ]
motor speed
P326 
encoder speed
Only when P325 = 1, 2, 3 or 4, therefore not in Servo mode (motor speed control)
SK 520E
P327 Slip error, speed control and above
0 ... 3000 rpm The limit value for a permitted maximum slip error can be set. If this value is reached, the FI
switches off and indicates error E013.1.
[0]
0 = OFF
Only when P325 = 0, therefore in Servo mode (motor speed control)

100 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.5 Control terminals

5.5 Control terminals

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P400 Analog input function 1 P

0 ... 82 The FI analog input can be used for various functions. It must be noted that only one of the
functions given below is possible at any time.
[1]
If, for example, an actual PID frequency is selected, the frequency setpoint cannot be an analog
signal. The setpoint can, e.g., be specified via a fixed frequency.
Analog functions:
0 = Off, the analog input has no function. After the FI has been enabled via the control
terminals, it will supply the set minimum frequency (P104).
1 = Set frequency, the given analog range (P402/P403) varies the output frequency
between the set minimum and maximum frequencies (P104/P105).
2 = Torque current limit, based on the set torque current limit (P112), this can be altered by
means of an analog value. 100% setpoint here corresponds to the set torque current limit
P112. 20% cannot be undershot (with P300=1, not below 10%)!
3 = Actual PID frequency *, is required to build up a control loop. The analog input (actual
value) is compared with the setpoint (e.g. fixed frequency). The output frequency is
adjusted as far as possible until the actual value equals the setpoint. (see control
variables P413...P415)
4 = Frequency addition **, the supplied frequency value is added to the setpoint.
5 = Frequency subtraction**, the supplied frequency value is subtracted from the setpoint.
6 = Current limit, based on the set current limit (P536), this can be altered by means of an
analog value.
7 = Maximum frequency, the maximum frequency of the FI is varied. 100% corresponds to
the setting in parameter P411. 0% corresponds to the setting in parameter P410. The
values for the min/max output frequency (P104/P105) cannot be exceeded or undershot.
8 = Actual frequency PID limited *, like function 3, actual frequency PID, however the
output frequency cannot fall below the programmed minimum frequency value in
Parameter P104. (no change to rotation direction)
9 = Actual frequency PID monitored *, as function 3, actual frequency PID, however the FI
switches the output frequency off when the minimum frequency P104 is reached.
10 = Servo mode torque, in servo mode P300 the motor torque can be set using this
function. Here the encoder P300 is switched off and a torque control activated. The
analog input is then the source of the setpoint value.
11 = Torque precontrol, function that enables a value for the anticipated torque requirement
to be entered in the controller (interference factor switching). This function can be used to
improve the load take-up of lift equipment with separate load detection.
12 = reserved
13 = Multiplication, the setpoint is multiplied with the analog value supplied. The analog
value adjusted to 100% then corresponds to a multiplication factor of 1.

... continued on the next page

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 101


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set
14 = Actual value process controller *, activates the process controller, analog input 1 is
connected to the actual value encoder (compensator, air can, flow volume meter, etc.).
The mode (0-10 V or 0/4-20 mA) is set in P401.
15 = Setpoint process controller *, as function 14, however the setpoint is specified (e.g. by
a potentiometer). The actual value must be specified using another input.
16 = Lead process controller *, adds an adjustable additional setpoint after the process
controller.
46 = Setpoint torque process controller
48 = Motor temperature measurement with KTY-84, details in section 4.3

*) further details regarding the process controller can be found in Section . 8.2 and P400
**) The limits of these values are set by the parameters
>Minimum frequency auxiliary setpoints< P410
and >Maximum frequency auxiliary setpoints< P411.

Digital functions:
21 = Enabled right 39 = reserved
22 = Enabled left 40 = reserved
23 = Change rotation direction 41 = Fixed frequency 5
24 = Fixed frequency 1 42 = ... 45/47/49 reserved SK 530E  BU 0510
25 = Fixed frequency 2 50 = PID controller on/off
26 = Fixed frequency 3 51 = Enable right blocked
27 = Fixed frequency 4 52 = Enable left blocked
28 = reserved 53 = ... 66 reserved
29 = Hold frequency 67 = Increase motor poti jog frequency
30 = Block voltage 68 = Reduce motor poti jog frequency
31 = Quick stop 69 = reserved
32 = error acknowledgement 70 = Bit 0 fixed frequency array
33 = reserved 71 = Bit 1 fixed frequency array
34 = reserved 72 = Bit 2 fixed frequency array
35 = Jog frequency 73 = Bit 3 fixed frequency array
36 = Maintain frequency "Motorpoti" 74 = Bit 4 fixed frequency array
37 = reserved 75 = …82 reserved for SK 530E  BU 0510
38 = Watchdog
A detailed description of the digital functions can be found after parameters P420 … P425.
The functions of the digital inputs are identical to the digital functions of the analog inputs.
Permissible voltage when using digital functions: 7.5...30V.
NOTE: The analog inputs with digital functions do not comply with EN61131-2 (Type 1
digital inputs) as the idling currents are too low.

102 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.5 Control terminals

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P401 Mode analog input 1 S

0 ... 3 0 = limited to 0 – 10V: An analog setpoint smaller than the programmed adjustment 0%
(P402) does not lead to undershooting of the programmed minimum frequency (P104).
[0] Therefore does not lead to any rotation direction reversal.

1 = 0 - 10V: If a setpoint smaller than the programmed adjustment 0% (P402) is present, this
can cause a change in direction rotation. This allows rotation direction reversal using a
simple voltage source and potentiometer.
E.g. internal setpoint with rotation direction change: P402 = 5V, P104 = 0Hz,
Potentiometer 0–10V  Rotation direction change at 5V in mid-range setting of the
potentiometer.
During the reversing moment (hysteresis =  P505), the drive stands still when the
minimum frequency (P104) is smaller than the absolute minimum frequency (P505). A
brake that is controlled by the FI will have entered the hysteresis range.
If the minimum frequency (P104) is greater than the absolute minimum frequency (P505),
the drive reverses when the minimum frequency is reached. In the hysteresis range 
P104, the FI supplies the minimum frequency (P104), the brake controlled by the FI is not
applied.

2 = 0 – 10V monitored: if the f / Hz


minimum adjusted setpoint
(P402) is undershot by 10% of the P105
difference value from P403 and (fmax)
P402, the FI output switches off. OFF = 2.0V - 10% * 8.0V = 1.2V
Once the setpoint is greater than
[P402 - (10% * (P403 - P402))], it
will deliver an output signal again.

P403 = 10.0V
P402 = 2.0V

P104
(fmin)
U/V
= 8.0V

e.g. setpoint 4-20mA P402: Adjustment 0% = 1V; P403: Adjustment 100% = 5V; -10%
corresponds to -0.4V; i.e. 1...5V (4...20mA) normal operating zone, 0.6...1V = minimum
frequency setpoint, below 0.6V (2.4mA) output switches off.

3 = - 10V – 10V: If a setpoint smaller than the programmed adjustment 0% (P402) is present,
this can cause a change in direction rotation. This allows rotation direction reversal using
a simple voltage source and potentiometer.
E.g. internal setpoint with rotation direction change: P402 = 5V, P104 = 0Hz,
Potentiometer 0–10V  Rotation direction change at 5V in mid-range setting of the
potentiometer.
During the reversing moment (hysteresis =  P505), the drive stands still when the
minimum frequency (P104) is smaller than the absolute minimum frequency (P505). A
brake that is controlled by the FI will not have entered the hysteresis range.
If the minimum frequency (P104) is greater than the absolute minimum frequency (P505),
the drive reverses when the minimum frequency is reached. In the hysteresis range
(P104, the FI supplies the minimum frequency P104), the brake controlled by the FI
does is not applied.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 103


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P402 Analog input adjustment 1: 0% S

-50.00 ... 50.00 V This parameter sets the voltage that should correspond with the minimum value of the selected
function for the analog input 1. In the factory setting (setpoint) this value is equivalent to the
[ 0.00 ] setpoint set via P104 >Minimum frequency<.
Typical setpoints and corresponding settings:
0 - 10 V  0.00 V
2 - 10 V  2.00 V (for function 0-10 V monitored)
0 - 20 mA  0.00 V (internal resistance approx. 250)
4 - 20 mA  1.00 V (internal resistance approx. 250)

P403 Analog input adjustment 1: 100% S

-50.00 ... 50.00 V This parameter sets the voltage that should correspond with the maximum value of the selected
function for the analog input 1. In the factory setting (setpoint) this value is corresponds with the
[ 10.00 ] setpoint set via P105 >Maximum frequency<.
Typical setpoints and corresponding settings:
0 - 10 V  10.00 V
2 - 10 V  10.00 V (for function 0-10 V monitored)
0 - 20 mA  5.00 V (internal resistance approx. 250)
4 - 20 mA  5.00 V (internal resistance approx. 250)

P400 ... P403


P401 = 0  0 - 10V limited P401 = 1  0 - 10V not limited

output output
frequency frequency

P105 P105

positive positive

P104 P104
0.0V 2.5V 5.0V 10.0V 0.0V 5.0V
2.5V 10.0V
setpoint setpoint
voltage voltage
P402 P403 P402 P403
negative

P404 Filter analog input 1 S

1 ... 400 ms
Adjustable digital low-pass filter for the analog signal. Interference peaks are hidden, the reaction
[ 100 ]
time is extended.

P405 Analog input function 2 P

0 ... 82
This parameter is identical to P400.
[0]

104 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.5 Control terminals

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P406 Analog input mode 2 S

0 ... 3 0 = limited to 0 – 10V


[0] 1 = 0 - 10V
2 = 0 – 10V monitored
3 = - 10V – 10V
This parameter is identical to P401. P402/403 change to P406/407.

P407 Analog input adjustment 2: 0% S

-50.00 ... 50.00 V


This parameter is identical to P402.
[ 0.00 ]

P408 Analog input adjustment 2: 100% S

-50.00 ... 50.00 V


This parameter is identical to P403.
[ 10.00 ]

P409 Filter analog input 2 S

1 ... 400 ms
This parameter is identical to P404.
[ 100 ]

Minimum frequency auxiliary


P410 P
setpoints
-400.0 ... 400.0 Hz The minimum frequency that can act on the setpoint via the auxiliary setpoints.
[ 0.0 ] Auxiliary setpoints are all frequencies that are additionally delivered for further functions in the FI:
Actual frequency PID Frequency addition Frequency subtraction
Auxiliary setpoints via BUS Process controller
Min. frequency above analog setpoint (potentiometer)

Maximum frequency auxiliary


P411 P
setpoints
-400.0 ... 400.0 Hz The maximum frequency that can act on the setpoint via the auxiliary setpoints.
[ 50.0 ] Auxiliary setpoints are all frequencies that are additionally delivered for further functions in the FI:
Actual frequency PID Frequency addition Frequency subtraction
Auxiliary setpoints via BUS Process controller
Max. frequency above analog setpoint (potentiometer)

P412 Nominal value process controller S P

-10.0 ... 10.0 V Fixed specification of a setpoint for the process controller that will only occasionally be altered.
[ 5.0 ] Only with P400 = 14 ... 16 (Process controller). Further details can be found in Section 8.2

P413 PID control P-component S P

0.0 ... 400.0 % This parameter is only effective when the function PID actual frequency is selected.
[ 10.0 ] The P-component of the PID controller determines the frequency jump if there is a rule deviation
based on the rule difference.
For example: At a setting of P413 = 10% and a rule difference of 50%, 5% is added to the actual
setpoint.

P414 PID control I-component S P

0.0 ... 3000.0 % This parameter is only effective when the function PID actual frequency is selected.
[ 10.0 ] The I-component of the PID controller determines the frequency change, dependent on time.
Up to SW 1.5 the setting range was 0.00 to 300.00 ‰/ms! This can cause incompatibilities in the
transfer of data sets between FIs with different software versions.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 105


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P415 PID control D-component S P

0 ... 400.0 %ms This parameter is only effective when the function PID actual frequency is selected.
[ 1.0 ] If there is a rule deviation, the D-component of the PID controller determines the frequency
change multiplied by time (%ms).
If one of the analog inputs is set in the function actual value process controller, this parameter
determines the controller limitation (%) after the PI controller. For further details, see Section 8.2.

P416 Ramp time PI setpoint. S P

0.00 ... 99.99s This parameter is only effective when the function PID actual frequency is selected.
[ 2.00 ] Ramp for PI setpoint

Main
setpoint sources
Also in
combination, see
setpoint adjustment
Fixed frequency 1-5
Jog frequency
Maximum
Scaling
Analog input 1 frequency P105
P400-P404
Scaling
Ramp setpoint
Analog input 2 P416 Maximum frequency P105 (monitored, limited)
P405-P409
Maximum frequency P105 (unlimited)
Controlbox /
PotentiometerBox

Bus setpoint 1,2,3 Minimum


frequency P104 Frequency ramp
PID controller P102, P103
Auxiliary
setpoint sources Maximum frequency P413 (P-component)
auxiliary setpoint P410 P414 ( I-component)
Scaling
Analog input 1 P400-P404 P415 (D-component)
Scaling
Analog input 2 P405-P409

PotentiometerBox
Minimum frequency P104 (monitored, limited)
Bus setpoint 2
- Maximum frequency P105 (unlimited)
Bus setpoint 3

Minimum frequency
auxiliary setpoint P411

Fig.: Flow diagram for PID controller

P417 Offset analog output 1 S P

-10.0 ... 10.0 V In the analog output function an offset can be entered to simplify the processing of the analog
signal in other equipment.
[ 0.0 ]
If the analog output has been programmed with a digital function, then the difference between the
switch-on point and the switch-off point can be set in this parameter (hysteresis).

106 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.5 Control terminals

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P418 Analog output function P

0 ... 52 Analog functions (max. load: 5mA analog, 20mA digital):


[0] An analog voltage (0 ... +10 Volt) can be taken from the control terminals (max. 5mA). Various
functions are available, whereby:
0 Volt analog voltage always corresponds to 0% of the selected value.
10 V always corresponds to the motor nominal values (unless otherwise stated) multiplied by the
P419 standardisation factor, e.g.:

 10Volt  motor nominal value  P419


100%

0 = No function, no output signal at the terminals.


1 = Actual frequency, the analog voltage is proportional to the FI output frequency.
2 = Actual speed, this is the synchronous speed calculated by the FI based on the existing
setpoint. Load-dependent speed fluctuations are not taken into account.
If Servo mode is being used, the measured speed will be output via this function.
3 = Current, the effective value of the output current supplied by the FI.
4 = Torque current, displays the motor load torque calculated by the FI. (100% = P112)
5 = Voltage, the output voltage supplied by the FI.
6 = Link voltage, the DC voltage in the FI. This is not based on the nominal motor data. 10V
Volt, standardised at 100%, is equivalent to 450V DC (230V mains) or 850 Volt DC (480V
mains)!
7 = Value from P542, the analog output can be set using parameter P542 independently of
the actual operating status of the FI For example, with Bus switching (parameter
command) this function can supply an analog value from the FI, which is triggered by the
control unit.
8 = Apparent power: the actual apparent power calculated by the FI.
9 = Effective power: the actual effective power calculated by the FI.
10 = Torque [%]: the current torque calculated by the FI.
11 = Field [%]: the current field in the motor calculated by the FI.
12 = Output frequency ±, the analog voltage is proportional to the output frequency of the FI,
whereby the zero point is shifted to 5V. For rotation to the right, values between 5V and
10V are output, and for rotation to the left values between 5V and 0V.
13 = Motor rotation speed ±, is the synchronic rotation speed calculated by the FI, based on
the current setpoint, where the null point has been shifted to 5V. For rotation to the right,
values between 5V and 10V are output, and for rotation to the left values between 5V
and 0V.
If Servo mode is being used, the measured speed will be output via this function.
14 = Torque [%] ±, is the actual torque calculated by the FI, whereby the zero point is shifted
to 5V. For drive torques, values between 5V and 10V are output, and for generator
torque, values between 5V and 0V.
30 = Setpoint frequency before frequency ramp, displays the frequency produced by any
upstream controllers (ISD, PID, etc.). This is then the setpoint frequency for the power
stage after it has been adjusted by the acceleration or braking ramp (P102, P103).
31 = Value via BUS, the analog output is controlled via a bus system. The process data is
directly transferred (P546, P547, P548).
33 = Frequency from setpoint source, “Frequency from setpoint source” (SW 1.6 and
above)

... continued on the next page

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 107


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set
Digital functions:
All relay functions described in Parameter >Function Relay 1< P434 can also be transferred via
the analog output. If a condition has been fulfilled, then there will be 10V at the output terminals.
Negation of the function can be set in the parameter >Norm. analog output< P419.
15 = External brake 28 = ... 29 reserved
16 = Inverter working 32 = FI ready
17 = Current limit 34 = ... 43 reserved for SK 530  BU 0510
18 = Torque current limit 44 = Bus In Bit 0
19 = Frequency limit 45 = Bus In Bit 1
20 = Setpoint reached 46 = Bus In Bit 2
21 = Error 47 = Bus In Bit 3
22 = Warning 48 = Bus In Bit 4
23 = Overcurrent warning 49 = Bus In Bit 5
24 = Overtemperature warning motor 50 = Bus In Bit 6
25 = Torque current limit active 51 = Bus In Bit 7
26 = Value from P541, external control 52 = Output via Bus (if P546, P547 or
P548 = 19), BUS Bit 4 then controls the
27 = Drive torque current limit analog output.

P419 Analog output standardisation P

-500 ... 500 % Analog functions P418 (= 0 ... 6 and 8 … 14, 30)
[ 100 ] Using this parameter an adjustment can be made to the analog output for the selected operating
zone. The maximum analog output (10V) corresponds to the standardisation value of the
appropriate selection.
If therefore, at a constant working point, this parameter is raised from 100% to 200%, the analog
output voltage is halved. 10 Volt output signal then corresponds to twice the nominal value.
For negative values the logic is reversed. A setpoint value of 0% will then produce 10V at the
output and -100% will produce 0V.
Digital functions P418 (= 15 ... 28, 34...52)
The switching threshold can be set using this parameter for the functions Current limit (= 17),
Torque current limit (= 18) and Frequency limit (= 19). A value of 100% refers to the
corresponding motor nominal value (see also P435).
With a negative value, the output function is output negated (0/1  1/0).

108 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.5 Control terminals

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P420 Digital input 1


0 ... 72 Enable right as factory setting, control terminal 21 (DIN1)
[1] Various functions can be programmed. These can be seen in the following table.

P421 Digital input 2


0 ... 72 Enable left as factory setting, control terminal 22 (DIN2)
[2] Various functions can be programmed. These can be seen in the following table.

P422 Digital input 3


0 ... 72 Parameter set switching Bit 0 as factory setting, control terminal 23 (DIN3)
[8] Various functions can be programmed. These can be seen in the following table.

P423 Digital input 4


0 ... 72 Fixed frequency 1 (P429) as factory setting, control terminal 24 (DIN4)
[4] Various functions can be programmed. These can be taken from the following table.

P424 Digital input 5


0 ... 72 No function as factory setting, control terminal 25 (DIN5)
[0] Various functions can be programmed. These can be seen in the following table.
SK 520E
P425 Digital input 6 and above
0 ... 72 No function as factory setting, control terminal 26 (DIN6)
[0] Various functions can be programmed. These can be seen in the following table.

Digital input 7 function = P470 (only SK 520/53xE), control terminal 27 (DIN7)

... Function descriptions follow on the next pages.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 109


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

List of the possible functions of the digital inputs P420 ... P425, P470

Value Function Description Signal


00 No function Input switched off. ---
01 Enabled right The FI delivers an output signal with the rotation field right if a High
positive setpoint is present. 0  1 Flank (P428 = 0)
02 Enabled left The FI delivers an output signal with the rotation field left if a High
positive setpoint is present. 0  1 Flank (P428 = 0)
If the drive is to start up automatically when the mains is switched on (P428 = 1) a permanent High level for
enabling must be provided (connect control terminals 21-42).
If the functions "Enabled right" and "Enabled left" are actuated simultaneously, the FI is blocked.
03 Change rotation direction Causes the rotation field to change direction, combined with High
Enable right or left.
1
04 Fixed frequency 1 The frequency from P429 is added to the actual setpoint value. High
1
05 Fixed frequency 2 The frequency from P430 is added to the actual setpoint value. High
1
06 Fixed frequency 3 The frequency from P431 is added to the actual setpoint value. High
1
07 Fixed frequency 4 The frequency from P432 is added to the actual setpoint value. High
If several fixed frequencies are actuated at the same time, then they are added with the correct sign. In addition,
the analog setpoint (P400) and possibly the minimum frequency (P104) are added.
08 Parameter set switch Bit 0 Selection of the active parameter set 1…4 (P100) High
09 Hold frequency During the acceleration or braking phase, a low level will Low
cause the actual output frequency to be "held". A high level
allows the ramp to proceed.
2
10 Voltage block The FI output voltage is switched off; the motor runs down Low
freely.
2
11 Quick stop The FI reduces the frequency according to the programmed Low
quick stop time (P426).
2
12 Error acknowledgement Error acknowledgement with an external signal. If this function 01
is not programmed, an error can also be acknowledged by a Flank
low enable setting (P506).
2
13 Thermistor input Analog evaluation of signal present. Switching threshold at level
approx. 2.5 V Switch-off delay = 2sec, warning after 1sec.
NOTE: Function 13 can only be used with sizes 1 - 4 via
DIN 5, terminal 25!
For sizes 5 – 6 there is a separate connection (X13:T1/T2),
which cannot be deactivated. If the motor is equipped with a
thermistor, both terminals must be bridged in order to
deactivate the function (status as delivered).
2
14 Remote control With Bus system control, low level switches the control to High
control via control terminals.
1
15 Jog frequency The fixed frequency value can be adjusted using the High
HIGHER/LOWER and ENTER keys (P113), if control is via
the ControlBox or ParameterBox.
16 Maintain frequency "Motorpoti" As for setting 09, however, below the minimum frequency Low
P104 and above the maximum frequency P105 the frequency
is not maintained.
17 Parameter set switch Bit 1 Selection of the active parameter set 1…4 (P100) High
2
18 Watchdog Input must see a high flank cyclically (P460); otherwise error
01
E012 will cause a shutdown. Function starts with the 1st high
Flank
flank.
19 Setpoint 1 on/off Analog input switch-on and switch-off 1/2 (high = ON) The low
signal sets the analog input to 0% which does not lead to
High
20 Setpoint 2 on/off shutdown when the minimum frequency (P104) > than the
absolute minimum frequency (P505).
... continued on the next page

110 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.5 Control terminals

Value Function Description Signal


1
21 Fixed frequency 5 The frequency from P433 is added to the actual setpoint value. High
22 ... 25 reserved
26 ... 29 impulse functions: Descriptions on next page.
30 PID controller On/Off Switching the PID controller / process controller function on High
and off (high = ON)
2
31 Enable right blocked Blocks the >Enable right/left< via a digital input or Bus control. Low
2
Does not depend on the actual direction of rotation of the
32 Enable left blocked motor (e.g. following negated setpoint). Low

33 ... 42 impulse functions: Descriptions on next page.


43 ... 44 Speed measurement with HTL encoder: Descriptions on next page.
45 3-Wire-Control Start-Right 01
(Closing button) This control function provides an alternative to enable R/L (01, Flank
02), in which a permanently applied level is required.
46 3-Wire-Control Start-Right 01
(Closing button) Here, only a control impulse is required to trigger the function. Flank
The control of the FI can therefore be performed entirely with
49 3-Wire-Control Stop buttons. (software version 1.5 and above) 10
(Opening button) Flank
47 Increase frequency In combination with enable R/L the output frequency can be
continuously varied. To save a current value in P113, both High
inputs must be at a High voltage for 0.5s. This value then
48 Decrease frequency applies as the next starting value for the same direction of
rotation (Enable R/L) otherwise start at fMIN. High

50 Bit 0 fixed frequency array High

51 Bit 1 fixed frequency array high

52 Binary coded digital inputs to generate up to 32 fixed


Bit 2 fixed frequency array high
frequencies. (P465: -01...-31)
53 Bit 3 fixed frequency array high

54 Bit 4 fixed frequency array high

55 …64 reserved for SK 530E  BU 0510


65 …69 reserved
70 Activate evacuation run Only for devices with external 24V control voltage SK 5x5E.
SW1.7 and above There is therefore also the possibility of operation with a very
low link circuit voltage. With this function the charging relay is High
activated and the undervoltage and phase error detection are
deactivated.
71 Motor potentiometer function With this motor pot. function (SW 1.6 and above) a setpoint
Frequency + value (sum) is set via the digital inputs, which is
with automatic saving simultaneously stored. With control enabling R/L this is then
started up in the correspondingly enabled direction. On
SW1.6 and above high
change of direction the frequency is retained.
Simultaneous activation of the +/- function causes the
frequency setpoint value to be set to zero.
The frequency setpoint value can also be displayed or set in
72 Motor potentiometer function the operating value display (P001=30, current setpoint MP-S’)
Frequency - or in P718.
with automatic saving
Any minimum frequency set (P104) is still effective. Other
SW1.6 and above setpoint values, e.g. analog or fixed frequencies can be added high
or subtracted.
The adjustment of the frequency setpoint value is performed
with the ramps from P102/103.
1
If neither of the digital inputs is programmed for left or right enable, then the actuation of a fixed frequency or jog frequency will
enable the frequency inverter. The rotation field direction depends on the sign of the setpoint.
2
Also effective for Bus control (RS232, RS485, CANbus, CANopen, DeviceNet, Profibus, InterBus, AS-Interface)

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 111


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Impulse input functions: 2...22kHz (only for DIN2 and DIN3 or 4)


For these functions the particular input evaluates the impulse frequency present. The frequency range 2kHz to 22kHz
thereby covers the range of values from 0 to 100%. The inputs operate up to a maximum impulse frequency of 32kHz. The
voltage level may be between 15V and 24V and the switch-on cycle between 50 and 80%.

Value Function Description Signal


2
26 Torque current limit Adjustable load limit, the output frequency is reduced when it Impulse
is reached.  P112
23
27 Actual PID frequency Possible feedback of actual value for the PID controller Impulse
23
28 Frequency addition Addition to other frequency setpoint values Impulse
23
29 Frequency subtraction Subtraction from other frequency setpoint values Impulse
2
33 Current limit Based on the set current limit (P536), this can be changed Impulse
using the digital/analog input.
23
34 Maximum frequency The maximum frequency of the FI is set in the analog range. Impulse
100% corresponds to the setting in parameter P411. 0%
corresponds to the setting in parameter P410. The values for
the min/max output frequency (P104/P105) cannot be
exceeded or undershot.
35 Actual frequency of PID controller Needed to build up a control loop. The digital/analog input Impulse
23
limited (actual value) is compared with the setpoint (e.g. other analog
input or fixed frequency). The output frequency is adjusted as
far as possible until the actual value equals the setpoint. (see
control variables P413 – P416)
The output frequency cannot fall below the programmed
minimum frequency value in parameter P104. (No rotation
direction change!)
36 Actual frequency of PID controller As function 35, >Actual frequency PID< but the FI switches Impulse
monitored 2 3 the output frequency off when the >Minimum frequency<
P104 is reached.
2
37 Torque servo mode The motor torque can be set or limited via this function in Impulse
Servo mode.
2
38 Torque precontrol Function that enables a value for the anticipated torque Impulse
requirement to be entered in the controller (interference factor
switching) This function can be used to improve the load take-
up of lift equipment with separate load detection.  P214
3
39 Multiplication This factor multiplies the master setpoint value. Impulse
40 PI process controller actual value As for P400 = 14-16 Impulse
41 PI process controller setpoint further details regarding the process controller can be found in Impulse
42 PI process controller lead Section 8.2 Impulse
43 This function can Impulse
Track A only be used for
HTL A 24V HTL encoder can be connected to DIN 2 and DIN 4 in <10kHz
the digital inputs 2 order to measure the speed. The maximum frequency at the
encoder (P421) and 4 DIN is limited to 10kHz. Accordingly, a suitable encoder (low
(P423) pulse number) or suitable mounting (slow speed) SHOULD
44 BE USED. Impulse
Only for SW 1.7 or
Track B higher and HW The direction of counting can be changed by exchanging the <10kHz
HTL CAA! functions on the digital inputs.
encoder
Further settings are in P461, P462, P463.

2
Also effective for Bus control (RS232, RS485, CANbus, CANopen, DeviceNet, Profibus, InterBus, AS-Interface)
3
The limits of these values are set by the parameters >Minimum frequency auxiliary setpoints< P410 and >Maximum frequency
auxiliary setpoints< P411.

112 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.5 Control terminals

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P426 Quick stop time P

0 ... 320.00 s Setting of the stop time for the fast stop function that can be triggered either via a digital input, the
bus control, the keyboard or automatically in case of a fault.
[ 0.10 ]
Quick stop time is the time for the linear frequency decrease from the set maximum frequency
(P105) to 0Hz. If an actual setpoint <100% is being used, the quick stop time is reduced
correspondingly.

P427 Quick stop on Error S

0 ... 3 Activation of automatic quick stop following error


[0] 0 = OFF: Automatic quick stop following error is deactivated
1 = Mains supply failure: Automatic quick stop following mains supply failure
2 = Error: Automatic quick stop following fault
3 = Mains supply failure and error: Automatic quick stop following mains supply failure and
error

P428 Automatic starting S P

0 ... 1 In the standard setting (P428 = 0  Off) the inverter requires a flank for enable (signal change
from "low  high") at the applicable digital input.
[0]
In the setting On  1 the FI reacts to a high level. This function is only possible if the FI is
controlled using the digital inputs. (see P509=0/1)
In certain cases, the FI must start up directly when the mains are switched on. This means that
P428 = 1  On can be set. If the enable signal is permanently switched on, or equipped with a
cable jumper, the FI starts up immediately.

P429 Fixed frequency 1 P

-400 ... 400 Hz Following actuation via a digital input and enabling of the FI (right or left), the fixed frequency is
used as a setpoint. A negative setting value will cause a direction change (based on the Enable
[0] rotation direction P420 – P425, P470).
If several fixed frequencies are actuated at the same time, then the individual values are added
with the correct sign. This also applies to combinations with the jog frequency (P113), analog
setpoint (if P400 = 1) or minimum frequency (P104).
The frequency limits (P104 = fmin, P105 = fmax) cannot be over or undershot.
If none of the digital inputs are programmed for enable (right or left), the simple fixed frequency
signal leads to an enable. A positive fixed frequency corresponds to a right enable, a negative to
a left enable.

P430 Fixed frequency 2 P

-400 ... 400 Hz


Function description of parameter, see P429 >Fixed frequency 1<
[0]

P431 Fixed frequency 3 P

-400 ... 400 Hz


Function description of parameter, see P429 >Fixed frequency 1<
[0]

P432 Fixed frequency 4 P

-400 ... 400 Hz


Function description of parameter, see P429 >Fixed frequency 1<
[0]

P433 Fixed frequency 5 P

-400 ... 400 Hz


Function description of parameter, see P429 >Fixed frequency 1<
[0]

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 113


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P434 Function output 1 (K1) P

0 ... 38 Control terminals 1/2: The settings 3 to 5 and 11 work with 10% hysteresis, i.e. the relay contact
closes (fct. 11 opens) when the limit value is reached and opens (fct. 11 closes) when a 10%
[1] smaller value is undershot. This behaviour can be inverted with a negative value in P435.

Relay contact ...


for limit value or
Setting / Function function
(see also P435)
0 = No function open
1 = External brake, to control a mechanical brake on the motor. The
relay switches at a programmed absolute minimum frequency (P505).
For typical brakes a setpoint delay of 0.2 … 0.3 seconds should be
programmed. Closes

A mechanical brake can be directly AC switched. (Please note the


technical specifications of the relay contacts)
2 = Inverter operating, the closed relay contact indicates voltage FI
Closes
output (U - V - W).
3 = Current limit, based on the setting of the motor rated current in
Closes
P203. This value can be adjusted with the standardisation (P435).
4 = Torque current limit, based on motor data settings in P203 and
P206. Signals a corresponding torque load on the motor. This value Closes
can be adjusted with the standardisation (P435).
5 = Frequency limit, based on motor nominal frequency setting in P201.
Closes
This value can be adjusted with the standardisation (P435).
6 = Setpoint reached, indicates that the FI has completed the frequency
increase or decrease. Setpoint frequency = actual frequency! From a Closes
difference of 1 Hz  Setpoint value not achieved – contact opens.
7 = Error, general error message, error is active or not yet
acknowledged. Error – contact opens Opens
(ready – contact closes)
8 = Warning: general warning, a limit value was reached that could lead
Opens
to a later shutdown of the FI.
9 = Overcurrent warning: At least 130% of the nominal FI current was
Opens
supplied for 30 seconds.
10 = Overtemperature motor (warning): The motor temperature is
evaluated via a digital input.  Motor is too hot. Warning occurs after Opens
2 seconds, overheating switch-off after seconds.
11 = Torque current limit/Current limit active (warning): The limiting
value in P112 or P536 has been reached. A negative value in P435 Opens
inverts the reaction. Hysteresis = 10%.
12 = Relay via P541 – external control, the relay can be controlled with
parameter P541 (Bit 0) independently of the actual operating status of Closes
the FI.
13 = Torque limit gen. active Limit value in P112 has been reached in
Closes
the generator range. Hysteresis = 10%.
18 = FI ready: The FI is in operative condition. Following successful
Closes
enabling, it will deliver an output signal.

114 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.5 Control terminals

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

14 = ... 29 reserved (excluding 18) ---


30 = Bus IO In Bit 0 / Bus In Bit 0 * Closes
31 = Bus IO In Bit 1 / Bus In Bit 1 * Closes

Further details in the BUS


32 = Bus IO In Bit 2 / Bus In Bit 2 * Closes
33 = Bus IO In Bit 3 / Bus In Bit 3 * Closes

manuals
34 = Bus IO In Bit 4 / Bus In Bit 4 * Closes
35 = Bus IO In Bit 5 / Bus In Bit 5 * Closes
36 = Bus IO In Bit 6 / Bus In Bit 6 * Closes
37 = Bus IO In Bit 7 / Bus In Bit 7 * Closes
38 = Value from Bus setpoint * Closes
39 = STO inactive: The relay / bit deactivates if STO or the Safe Stop are
Closes
active.
*) P546...P548 = 17 or 19

P435 Standardisation output 1 P

-400 ... 400 % Adjustment of the limit values of the relay function. For a negative value, the output function will
be output negative.
[ 100 ]
Reference to the following values:
Current limit (3) = x [%]  P203 >Motor nominal current<
Torque current limit (4) = x [%]  P203  P206 (calculated nominal motor torque)
Frequency limit (5) = x [%]  P201 >Nominal motor frequency<

P436 Hysteresis output 1 S P

1 ... 100 %
Difference between switch-on and switch-off point to prevent oscillation of the output signal.
[ 10 ]

P441 Function output 2 (K2) P

0 ... 39
Control terminals 3/4: Functions are identical to P434!
[7]

P442 Standardisation output 2 P

-400 ... 400 %


Functions are identical to P435!
[ 100 ]

P443 Hysteresis output 2 S P

1 ... 100 %
Functions are identical to P436!
[ 10 ]
SK 520E
P450 Function output 3 (DOUT1) and above
P

0 ... 39 Control terminals 5/40: Functions are identical to P434! Digital output, 15V to DGND
[0] (for SK 5x5E devices, deviations of the signal level are possible (See section 2.12.3)).

SK 520E
P451 Standardisation output 3 and above
P

-400 ... 400 %


Functions are identical to P435!
[ 100 ]

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 115


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set
SK 520E
P452 Hysteresis output 3 and above
S P

1 ... 100 %
Functions are identical to P436!
[ 10 ]
SK 520E
P455 Function output 4 (DOUT2) and above
P

0 ... 39 Control terminals 7/40: Functions are identical to P434! Digital output, 15V to DGND
[0] (for SK 5x5E devices, deviations of the signal level are possible (See section 2.12.3)).

SK 520E
P456 Standardisation output 4 and above
P

-400 ... 400 %


Functions are identical to P435!
[ 100 ]
SK 520E
P457 Hysteresis output 4 and above
S P

1 ... 100 %
Functions are identical to P436!
[ 10 ]

P460 Time Watchdog S

0.0 / 0.1 ... 250.0 s 0.1 ... 250.0 = The time interval between the expected Watchdog signals (programmable function
of the digital inputs P420 – P425). If this time interval elapses without an impulse being
[ 10.0 ] registered, a switch-off and error message E012 are actuated.
0.0 = customer error: As soon as a high-low flank or a low signal is detected at a digital input
(function 18) the FI switches off with error message E012.

P461 Function 2 Encoder


0 ... 4 The actual speed list value supplied by an incremental encoder to the FI can be used for various
functions in the FI. (Settings are identical to P325)
[0]
0 = Rotation speed measurement Servo mode: The actual motor speed list value is used
SW 1.7 or higher and for the FI servo mode. The ISD control cannot be switched off in this function. Here P413
hardware status CAA and P414 determine the P and I proportion of the control.
1 = PID actual frequency value: The actual rotation speed of a system is used for rotation
speed control. This function can also be used for controlling a motor with a linear
characteristic curve. Here P413 and P414 determine the P and I proportion of the control.
2 = Frequency addition: The rotation speed deduced is added to the current setpoint value.
3 = Frequency subtraction: The determined speed is subtracted from the actual setpoint.
4 = Maximum frequency: The maximum possible output frequency / speed is limited by the
speed of the encoder.

P462 Pulse number 2 Encoder


16 ... 8192 Input of the pulse-count per rotation (16-8192) of the connected encoder.
[ 1024 ] If the encoder rotation direction is not the same as the FI, (depending on installation and wiring), it
can be compensated for by selecting the corresponding negative pulse numbers.
SW1.7 and above

P463 2. Encoder conversion


0.01 ... 100.0 If the incremental encoder is not mounted directly onto the motor shaft, then the respectively
correct transformation ratio of motor speed to encoder speed must be set.
[ 1.00 ]
motor speed
SW1.7 and above P463 
encoder speed
only when P461 = 1, 2, 3 or 4, therefore not in Servo mode (motor speed control)

116 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.5 Control terminals

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P464 Fixed frequency modes


0 ... 1 This parameter determines the form in which fixed frequencies are to be processed.
[0] 0 = Addition to main setpoint: Fixed frequencies and the fixed frequency array are added
to each other. I.e. they are added together, or added to an analog setpoint to which limits
SW1.7 and above are assigned according to P104 and P105.
1 = Main setpoint: Fixed frequencies are not added - neither together, nor to analog
setpoints.
If for example, a fixed frequency is switched to an existing analog setpoint, the analog
setpoint will no longer be considered.
A programmed frequency addition or subtraction to one of the analog inputs or bus
setpoints is still possible and valid.
If several fixed frequencies are selected simultaneously, the frequency with the highest
value has priority (E.g.: 20>10 or 20>-30)

P465 … - 01
... Fixed frequency, field
... - 31
-400.0 ... 400.0 Hz In the array levels, up to 31 different fixed frequencies can be set, which in turn can be encoded
for the functions 50…54 in binary code for the digital inputs.
[0]

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 117


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P466 Minimum frequency process


P
controller
-400.0 ... 400.0 Hz With the aid of the minimum frequency process controller the control ratio can also be kept to a
minimum ratio, even with a master value of “zero”, in order to enable adjustment of the
[ 0.0 ] compensator. Further details in P400 and Section 8.2.

P470 Digital input 7 SK 520E

0 ... 72 No function as factory setting, control terminal 27 (DIN7)


[0] Various functions can be programmed. These can be taken from tables for P420…P425.

P475 … - 01
... Switch on/off delay S
... - 09
-30.000 ... 30.000 s Adjustable switch-on/off delay for the digital inputs and the digital functions of the analog inputs.
Use as a switch-on filter or simple process control is possible.
[ 0.000 ]
[01] = Digital input 1 [06] = Digital input 6 (only SK 52x/53xE)
[02] = Digital input 2 [07] = Digital input 7 (only SK 52x/53xE)
[03] = Digital input 3 [08] = Digital function, analog input 1
[04] = Digital input 4 [09] = Digital function, analog input 2
[05] = Digital input 5
Positive values = switch-on delayed Negative values = switch-off delayed

P480 ... - 01
... Function Bus I/O In Bits S
... - 12
0 ... 72 The Bus I/O In Bits are perceived as digital inputs. They can be set to the same functions
(P420...425).
[0]
[01] = Bus I/O In Bit 0 [07] = Bus I/O In Bit 6
[02] = Bus I/O In Bit 1 [08] = Bus I/O In Bit 7
[03] = Bus I/O In Bit 2 [09] = Flag 1
[04] = Bus I/O In Bit 3 [10] = Flag 2
[05] = Bus I/O In Bit 4 [11] = Bit 8 BUS control word
[06] = Bus I/O In Bit 5 [12] = Bit 9 BUS control word
The possible functions for the Bus In Bits can be found in the table of functions for the digital
inputs P420...425.
For further details, please refer to the manual for the AS interface, BU 0090.

118 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.5 Control terminals

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P481 ... - 01
... Function Bus I/O Out Bits S
... - 10
0 ... 38 The Bus I/O Out Bits are perceived as multi-function relay outputs. They can be set to the same
functions (P434; P441; P450; P455).
[0]
[01] = Bus I/O Out Bit 0 [07] = Flag 1
[02] = Bus I/O Out Bit 1 [08] = Flag 2
[03] = Bus I/O Out Bit 2 [09] = Bit 10 BUS status word
[04] = Bus I/O Out Bit 3 [10] = Bit 13 BUS status word
[05] = Bus I/O Out Bit 4
[06] = Bus I/O Out Bit 5
The possible functions for the Bus Out Bits can be found in the table of functions for
the relay P434.
For further details, please refer to the manual for the AS interface, BU 0090.

P482 ... - 01
... Standardisation Bus I/O Out Bits S
... - 10
-400 … 400 % Adjustment of the limit values of the relay functions/Bus Out Bits. For a negative value, the output
function will be output negative.
[ 100 ]
When the limit value is reached and the setting values are positive, the relay contact closes, with
negative setting values the relay contact opens.

P483 ... - 01
... Hysteresis Bus I/O Out Bits S
... - 10
1 … 100 %
[ 10 ] Difference between switch-on and switch-off point to prevent oscillation of the output signal.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 119


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

5.6 Additional parameters

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P502 ... - 01
... Leading function value S P
... - 03
0 ... 21 Selection of up to 3 master values:
[0] [01] = Master value 1 [02] = Master value 2 [03] = Master value 3

Selection of possible setting values for master values:


0 = Off 8 = Setpoint frequency 17 = Value analog input 1
1 = Actual frequency 9 = Error message 18 = Value analog input 2
2 = Actual speed 10 = reserved 19 = Desired frequency
master value
3 = Current 11 = reserved
20 = Desired frequency
4 = Torque current 12 = Digital Out Bit 0…7 after master value
5 = State of digital inputs 13 = reserved ramp
and outputs 21 = Actual frequency
14 = reserved
6 = reserved without master
15 = reserved value slip
7 = reserved
16 = reserved

P503 Leading function output S

0 ... 3 To use the Leading function output, the inverter controller source must be selected in P509.
The master value to be transmitted is determined via the BUS interface in parameter P502.
[0]
0 = Off 1 = USS 2 = CAN (up to 250kBaud) 3 = CANopen

P504 Pulse frequency S

3.0 ... 16.0 kHz The internal pulse frequency for actuating the power component can be changed with this
parameter. A higher setting reduces motor noise, but leads to increased EMC emissions and
[ 6.0 ] reduction of the possible motor nominal torque.
NOTE: The radio interference suppression limiting curve A1 according to EN55011 is
complied with at a setting of 6.0kHz on condition that the wiring guidelines are
complied with. For further details, see Section 8.4. EMC limit value classes.
NOTE: Raising the pulse frequency leads to a reduction of the possible output current,
depending on the time (I2t curve). For further details, see Section 8.5. Power de-
rating.

P505 Absolute minimum frequency S P

0.0 ... 10.0 Hz Gives the frequency value that cannot be undershot by the FI. If the setpoint becomes smaller
than the absolute minimum frequency, the FI switches off or changes to 0.0Hz.
[ 2.0 ]
At the absolute minimum frequency, braking control (P434 or P441) and the setpoint delay (P107)
are actuated. If a setting value of "Zero" is selected, the brake relay does not switch during
reversing.
When controlling lift equipment, this value should be set at a minimum of 2Hz. From 2Hz, the
current control of the FI operates and a connected motor can supply sufficient torque.
NOTE: Output frequencies < 2Hz lead to current limitation.
For further details, see Section 8.5. Power de-rating.

120 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.6 Additional parameters
Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

Automatic error
P506 S
acknowledgement
0 ... 7 In addition to the manual error acknowledgement, an automatic one can also be selected.
[0] 0= No automatic error acknowledgement
1 ... 5 = Number of permissible automatic malfunction acknowledgments within one mains-
on cycle. After mains off and switch on again, the full amount is again available.
6= Always, an error message will always be acknowledged automatically if the cause of
the error is no longer present.
7= ENTER key, acknowledgement is only possible using the ENTER key or by mains
switch-off. No acknowledgement is implemented by removing the enable!

P507 PPO Type


1 ... 4 This parameter can only be used with the technology unit Profibus, DeviceNet or InterBus
[1] See also additional descriptions BU 0020, BU 0080, BU 0070

P508 Profibus address


1 ... 126 Profibus address, only with the technology unit Profibus
[1] See also the additional description for the Profibus control BU 0020

P509 Control word source


0 ... 10 Selection of the interface via which the FI is controlled.
[0] 0 = Control terminals or keyboard control ** with the Control Box (when P510=0), the
Parameter Box (not ext. p-box) or via Bus I/O Bits.
1 = Only control terminals *, the FI can only be controlled via the digital and analog input
signals or via the Bus I/O Bits.
2 = USS control word *, the control signals (enable, rotation direction, etc.) are transferred
via the RS485 interface, the setpoint via the analog input or the fixed frequencies.
3 = CAN control word *
4 = Profibus control word *
NOTE:
5 = InterBus control word * For details about the respective Bus systems please
6 = CANopen control word * refer to the respective Options descriptions:
BU 0020 = Profibus BU 0050 = USS
7 = DeviceNet control word *
BU 0060 = CAN/CANopen BU 0070 = InterBus
8 = reserved
BU 0080 = DeviceNet BU 0090 = AS Interface
9 = CAN Broadcast *
- www.nord.com -
10 = CANopen Broadcast *
*) Keyboard control (ControlBox, ParameterBox) is blocked, parameterisation is still possible.
**) If the communication during keyboard control is interrupted (time out 0.5 sec),
the FI will block without an error message.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 121


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P510 ... - 01
Setpoint source S
... - 02
0 ... 10 Selection of the setpoint source to be parameterised.
[0] [01] = Master setpoint value source [02] = Auxiliary setpoint value source

Selection of the interface via which the FI receives the setpoint.


0 = Auto: The source of the auxiliary setpoint is 4 = Profibus
automatically derived from the setting in the parameter
P509 >Interface< 5 = InterBus

1 = Control terminals, digital and analog inputs control the 6 = CANopen


frequency, including fixed frequencies 7 = DeviceNet
2 = USS 8 = reserved
3 = CAN 9 = CAN Broadcast
10 = CANopen Broadcast

P511 USS Baud rate S

0 ... 3 Setting of the transfer rate (transfer speed) via the RS485 interface. All bus participants must
have the same baud rate setting.
[3]
0 = 4800 baud 2 = 19200 baud
1 = 9600 baud 3 = 38400 baud

P512 USS address


0 ... 30
Setting the FI Bus address.
[0]

P513 Telegram down time S

-0.1 / 0.0 / Monitoring function of the active bus interface. Following receipt of a valid telegram, the next one
0.1 ... 100.0 s must arrive within the set period. Otherwise the FI reports an error and switches off with the error
message E010 >Bus Time Out<.
[ 0.0 ]
0.0 = Off: Monitoring is switched off.
-0.1 = no error: Even if communication between BusBox and FI is interrupted (e.g. 24V error, Box
removed, etc.), the FI will continue to operate unchanged.

P514 CAN Baud rate


0 ... 7 Used to set the transfer rate (transfer speed) via the CANbus interface. All bus participants must
have the same baud rate setting.
[4]
Additional information is contained in the manual BU 0060 CAN/CANopen.
0 = 10kBaud 3 = 100kBaud 6 = 500kBaud
1 = 20kBaud 4 = 125kBaud 7 = 1Mbaud * (test
purposes only)
2 = 50kBaud 5 = 250kBaud
*) Safe operation cannot be guaranteed

P515 ... - 01
… CAN address
... - 03
0 ... 255 Setting for the CANbus address.
[ 50 ] From SW 1.6 and above, can be set in three levels:
[01] = Receipt address for CAN and CANopen (as before)
[02] = Broadcast – receipt address for CANopen (Slave)
[03] = Broadcast –Transmission address for CANopen (Master)

122 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.6 Additional parameters
Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P516 Masking frequency 1 S P

0.0 ... 400.0 Hz The output frequency around the frequency value (P517) set here is masked.
[ 0.0 ] This range is transmitted with the set brake and acceleration ramp; it cannot be continuously
supplied to the output. Frequencies below the absolute minimum frequency should not be set.
0 = Masking frequency inactive

P517 Masking frequency range 1 S P

0.0 ... 50.0 Hz Masking range for the >Masking frequency 1< P516. This frequency value is added and
subtracted from the masking frequency.
[ 2.0 ]
Masking frequency range 1: P516 - P517 ... P516 + P517

P518 Masking frequency 2 S P

0.0 ... 400.0 Hz The output frequency around the frequency value (P519) set here is masked.
[ 0.0 ] This range is transmitted with the set brake and acceleration ramp; it cannot be continuously
supplied to the output. Frequencies below the absolute minimum frequency should not be set.
0 = Masking frequency inactive

P519 Masking frequency range 2 S P

0.0 ... 50.0 Hz Masking range for the >Masking frequency 2< P518. This frequency value is added and
subtracted from the masking frequency.
[ 2.0 ]
Masking frequency range 2: P518 - P519 ... P518 + P519

P520 Flying start S P

0 ... 4 This function is required to connect the FI to already rotating motors, e.g. in fan drives. Motor
frequencies >100Hz are only picked up in speed controlled mode (Servo mode P300 = ON).
[0]
0 = Switched off, no flying start circuit.
1 = Both directions, the FI looks for a speed in both directions.
2 = Setpoint value direction, searches only in the direction of the setpoint value present.
3 = Both directions, only following mains supply failure and error
4 = In setpoint direction, only following mains supply failure and error
NOTE: For physical reasons, the flying start circuit only operates above 1/10 of the nominal
motor frequency (P201), however not below 10Hz.
Example 1 Example 2
(P201) 50Hz 200Hz
f=1/10*(P201) f=5Hz f=20Hz
Comparison of f vs. fmin 5Hz < 10Hz 20Hz < 10Hz
with: fmin =10Hz
The flying start circuit The flying start circuit
Result fFang= functions above functions above
fFang=10Hz. fFang=20Hz.

P521 Flying start resolution S P

0.02... 2.50 Hz Using this parameter, the flying start circuit search increment size can be adjusted. Values that
are too large affect accuracy and causes the FI to cut out with an overcurrent report. If the values
[ 0.05 ] are too small, the search time is greatly extended.

P522 Flying start offset S P

-10.0 ... 10.0 Hz A frequency value that can be added to the frequency value found, e.g. to remain in the motor
range and so avoid the generator range and therefore the chopper range.
[ 0.0 ]

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 123


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P523 Factory setting


0 ... 2 By selecting the appropriate value and confirming it with the ENTER key, the selected parameter
range is entered in the factory setting. Once the setting has been made, the value of the
[0] parameter returns automatically to 0.
0 = No change: Does not change the parameterisation.
1 = Load factory settings: The complete parameterisation of the FI reverts to the factory
setting. All originally parameterised data are lost.
2 = Factory settings without bus: All parameters of the frequency inverter, with the
exception of the bus parameter, are reset to the factory setting.

P533 Factor I2t-Motor S

50 ... 150 %
2
The motor current for the I t motor monitoring P535 can be weighted with the parameter P533.
[ 100 ]
Larger factors permit larger currents.
SW1.6 and above

P534 ... - 01
Torque-based disconnection limit S
... - 02
0 ... 400 % / 401 Via this parameter both the drive [-01] and the generator [-02] switch-off value can be adjusted.
[ 401 ] If 80% of the set value is reached, a warning status is set. At 100% switch-off is performed with
an error message.
Error 12.1 is given on exceeding the drive switch-off limit and 12.2on exceeding the generator
switch-off limit.
[01] = drive switch-off limit [02] = generator switch-off limit
401 = OFF, means that this function has been disabled.
2
P535 I t-Motor
0 ... 1 When calculating the motor temperature, the output current, time and the output frequency
(cooling) are taken into account. If the temperature limit value is reached then switch off occurs
[0] and error message E002 (motor overheating) is output. Possible positive or negative effects of
ambient conditions cannot be taken into account here.
0 = disabled
1 = Switched on
0 … 24 The I2t motor function can now be set in a differentiated manner. Up to four curves with three
different triggering times can be set. The trigger times are based on classes 5, 10 and 20 for
[0] semiconductor switching devices. Setting 5 corresponds to the previous setting “ON”.
SW1.6 and above All curves run from 0Hz to half of the nominal frequency (P201). From half of the nominal
frequency upwards, the full nominal current is available.

Switch-off class 5, Switch-off class 10, Switch-off class 20,


60s at 1.5x IN 120s at 1.5x IN 240s at 1.5x IN
IN at 0Hz P535 IN at 0Hz P535 IN at 0Hz P535
100% 1 100% 9 100% 17
90% 2 90% 10 90% 18
80% 3 80% 11 80% 19
70% 4 70% 12 70% 20
60% 5 60% 13 60% 21
50% 6 50% 14 50% 22
40% 7 40% 15 40% 23
30% 8 30% 16 30% 24

124 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.6 Additional parameters
Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P536 Current limit S

0.1 ... 2.0 / 2.1 The inverter output current is limited to the set value. If this limit value is reached, the inverter
(x nominal FI reduces the actual output frequency.
current)
Multiplier with the inverter nominal current, gives the limit value
[ 1.5 ]
2.1 = OFF, OFF represents the disabling of this limit value.

P537 Pulse switch-off S

10 ... 200 % / 201 This function prevents rapid shutdown of the FI according to the load. With the pulse switch-off
enabled, the output current is limited to the set value. This limitation is implemented by brief
[ 150 ] switching off of individual output stage transistors, the actual output frequency remains
unchanged.
10...200% = Limit value related to the nominal FI current
201 = Function is disabled
NOTE: The value set here can be undershot by a smaller value in P536.
For smaller output frequencies (<4.5Hz) or higher pulse frequencies (>6kHz or
8kHz, P504) the pulse switch-off by the power reduction (see Section 8.5) can be
undershot.
NOTE: If the pulse switch-off is disabled (P537=201) and a high pulse frequency is
selected in parameter P504, the FI automatically reduces the pulse frequency
when the power limit is reached. If the load on the FI is again reduced, the pulse
frequency increases to the original value again.

P538 Mains voltage monitoring S

0 ... 4 For safe operation of the inverter the power supply must meet a certain quality. If there is a brief
interruption of a phase or the voltage supply sinks below a particular limit value, the inverter will
[3] output an error.
Under certain operating conditions, it may be necessary to suppress this error message. In this
case, the input monitoring can be adjusted.
0 = Disabled: No monitoring of the supply voltage.
1 = Only phase errors: only phase errors will produce an error message.
2 = Only low voltage: only low voltage will produce an error message.
3 = Phase error and low voltage: Phase errors and low voltage generate error messages.
4 = DC supply: The input voltage is fixed at 480V for the direct supply of direct current.
Phase error and low mains voltage monitoring are deactivated.
NOTE: Operation with an impermissible mains voltage can destroy the frequency inverter!
With 1/3~230V or 1~115V devices, the phase error monitoring does not function!

P539 Output monitoring S P

0 ... 3 This protective function monitors the output current at the U-V-W terminals and checks for
plausibility. In cases of error, the error message E016 is output.
[0]
0 = Disabled: Monitoring is not active.
1 = Motor phase error only: The output current is measured and checked for symmetry. If
an imbalance is present, the FI switches off and outputs the error message E016.
2 = Excitation monitoring only: At the moment the FI is switched on, the level of the
excitation current (field current) is checked. If insufficient excitation current is present, the
FI switches off with the error message E016. A motor brake is not released in this phase.
3 = Motor phase and excitation monitoring: as 1 and 2 combined
NOTE: This function can be used as an additional protective function for lifting applications,
but is not permissible on its own as protection for persons.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 125


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P540 Rotation direction mode S P

0 ... 7 For safety reasons this parameter can be used to prevent a rotation direction reversal and
therefore the incorrect rotation direction.
[0]
This function does not work with active position control (SK 53xE only, P600 ≠ 0).
0 = No rotation direction limitation
1 = Block direction reversal, the direction reverse button of the ControlBox
SK TU3-CTR is blocked.
2 = CW only*, only clockwise direction is possible. The selection of the "incorrect" rotation
direction leads to the output of the minimum frequency P104 with the field of rotation R.
3 = CCW only*, only counter-clockwise direction is possible. The selection of the "incorrect"
rotation direction leads to the output of the minimum frequency P104 with the field of
rotation L.
4 = Enable direction only, rotation direction is only possible according to the enable signal,
otherwise 0Hz is output.
5 = CW only monitored*, only CW rotation is possible. The selection of the "incorrect"
rotation direction leads to the FI switching off (control block). If necessary, an adequately
large setpoint value (>fmin) must be observed.
6 = CCW only monitored*, only CCW rotation is possible. The selection of the "incorrect"
rotation direction leads to the FI switching off (control block). If necessary, an adequately
large setpoint value (>fmin) must be observed.
7 = Enable direction only monitored, Rotation direction is only possible according to the
enable signal, otherwise the FI is switched off.

*) Applies to keyboard (SK TU3-) and control terminal actuation,


in addition, the direction key on the ControlBox is blocked.

P541 Set Output S

0000 ... 3F1F (hex) This function provides the opportunity to control the relay and the digital outputs independently of
the frequency inverter status. To do this, the relevant output must be set to the function "External
[ 0000 ] control".
This function can either be used manually or in combination with a bus control.
Bit 0 = Output 1 (K1) Bit 4 = Dig. AOut 1 Bit 10 = Bus Out Bit 2
(Analog output 1)
Bit 1 = Output 2 (K2) Bit 11 = Bus Out Bit 3
Bit 5 … 7 = reserved
Bit 2 = Output 3 (DOUT1) Bit 12 = Bus Out Bit 4
Bit 8 = Bus Out Bit 0
Bit 3 = Output 4 (DOUT2) Bit 13 = Bus Out Bit 5
Bit 9 = Bus Out Bit 1

Bit 13 -12 Bit 11 -8 Bit 7 -4 Bit 3 -0


00 0000 0000 0000 Binary
Min. Value
0 0 0 0 hex
11 1111 0001 1111 Binary
Max. Value
3 F 1 F hex

BUS: The corresponding hex value is written into the parameter, thereby setting the
relay and digital outputs.
ControlBox: The hexadecimal code is entered directly when the ControlBox is used.
ParameterBox: Each individual output can be separately called up in plain text and activated.

126 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.6 Additional parameters
Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P542 Set analog output S

0.0 ... 10.0 V The analog output of the FI can be set with this function, independently of the actual operating state.
To do this, the relevant analog output must be set to the function "External control" (P418 = 7).
[ 0.0 ]
This function can either be used manually or in combination with a bus control. The value set here
will, once confirmed, be produced at the analog output.

P543 Actual bus value 1 S P

0 ... 22 The return value 1 can be selected for bus actuation in this parameter.
[1] NOTE: Further details can be found in the respective BUS operating instructions or in the
description of P418.
0 = Off 10 = … 11 reserved
1 = Actual frequency 12 = Bus IO Out Bits 0...7
2 = Actual speed 13 = … 16 reserved
3 = Current 17 = Value analog input 1 (P400)
4 = Torque current (100% = P112) 18 = Value analog input 2 (P405)
5 = State of digital inputs and outputs 1 19 = Desired frequency master value (P503)
6 = … 7 reserved
20 = Desired frequency after master value
8 = Setpoint frequency ramp
9 = Error number 21 = Actual frequency without master value slip
22 = Speed l from encoder (only possible with
SK 520/53xE and encoder feedback)

P544 Actual bus value 2 S P

0 ... 22
This parameter is identical to P543.
[0]
Condition is PPO 2 or PPO 4 type (P507).

P545 Actual bus value 3 S P

0 ... 22
This parameter is identical to P543.
[0]
Condition is PPO 2 or PPO 4 type (P507).

1
The assignment of the dig. inputs in P543/ 544/ 545 = 5

Bit 0 = DigIn 1 Bit 1 = DigIn 2 Bit 2 = DigIn 3 Bit 3 = DigIn 4


Bit 4 = DigIn 5 Bit 5 = DigIn 6 (SK 520/53xE) Bit 6 = DigIn 7 (SK 520/53xE) Bit 7 = reserved
Bit 8 = reserved Bit 9 = reserved Bit 10 = reserved Bit 11 = reserved
Bit 12 = Out 1 Bit 13 = Out 2 Bit 14 = Out 3 (SK 520/53xE) Bit 15 = Out 4 (SK 520/53xE)

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 127


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P546 Bus setpoint 1 S P

0 ... 47 In this parameter, a function is allocated to the output setpoint 1 during bus actuation.
[1] NOTE: Further details can be found in the respective BUS operating instructions or in the
description of P400.
0 = Off 12 = reserved
1 = Setpoint frequency (16 Bit) 13 = Multiplication
2 = Torque current limit (P112) 14 = PI process controller actual value
3 = Actual frequency PID 15 = PI process controller setpoint
4 = Frequency addition 16 = PI process controller lead
5 = Frequency subtraction 17 = Bus In Bits 0...7
6 = Current limit (P536) 18 = reserved
7 = Maximum frequency (P105) 19 = Status output (P434/441/450/455=38)
8 = Actual PID frequency limited 20 = Value analog output (P418=31)
9 = Actual PID frequency monitored 21 = …45 reserved for SK 530E  BU 0510
10 = Torque servo mode (P300) 46 = Setpoint torque process controller
11 = Torque precontrol (P214) 47 = reserved

P547 Bus setpoint 2 S P

0 ... 47
This parameter is identical to P546.
[0]

P548 Bus setpoint 3 S P

0 ... 47
This parameter is identical to P546.
[0]

P549 PotentiometerBox function S

0 ... 16 In this parameter, the setpoint of the PotentiometerBox (SK TU3-POT) is assigned with a function.
(An explanation can be found in the description of P400)
[0]
As of software version 1.7 R0, on setting 4 or 5, the ControlBox or the ParameterBox are also set
to function as suppliers of auxiliary setpoints. (See Section 4.4)
0 = Off 8 = Actual PID frequency limited
1 = Setpoint frequency 9 = Actual PID frequency monitored
2 = Torque current limit 10 = Torque
3 = Actual frequency PID 11 = Torque precontrol
4 = Frequency addition 12 = reserved
5 = Frequency subtraction 13 = Multiplication
6 = Current limit 14 = PI process controller actual value
7 = Maximum frequency 15 = PI process controller setpoint
16 = PI process controller lead
Controlling the FI with the SK CSX-0: If P549=1 is set and the operating value display P000 is
selected, the drive can be controlled with the SimpleBox (see Section 3.2.1) on the FI.
Depressing the button for a long time starts the drive, pressing briefly stops it. The speed of
rotation can be controlled in the positive and negative range by means of the rotating knob.
Control of the FI with the SimpleBox is not possible in combination with the ParameterBox SK
TU3-PAR.
NOTE: Please note that in this operating mode the drive can only be stopped with the
button in the operating value display (brief press) or by switching off the mains
supply.

128 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.6 Additional parameters
Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P550 ParameterBox Orders


0 ... 3 Within the optional ControlBox it is possible to save a data set (parameter set 1 … 4) of the
connected FI. This is saved in a non-volatile memory within the Box, and can therefore be
[0] transferred for other SK 5xxE units with the same database version (see P742).
0 = No function
1 = FI  ControlBox, dataset is written from the connected FI to the ControlBox.
2 = ControlBox  FI, dataset is written from the ControlBox to the connected FI.
3 = FI  ControlBox, the FI dataset is exchanged with the ControlBox dataset. With this
variant, no data is lost. It is continuously exchangeable.
NOTE: If parameterisation from old FI's need to be loaded into FIs with new software (P707),
then the ControlBox must previously be written to by the new FI (P550 = 1). The
dataset to be copied from the old FI can then be read out and copied to the new FI.

P551 Drive profile S

0…1 According to the option the relevant process data profiles can be activated with this parameter.
[0] This parameter is only effective for pluggable technology modules (SK TU3-…).
System CANopen* DeviceNet InterBus
Technology modules SK TU3-CAO SK TU3-DEV SK TU3-IBS
Setting
0= USS protocol (Profile “Nord”)
1= DS402 profile AC Drives profile Drivecom profile
Note: With the use of the internal CANbus (CANnord/CANopen) via the integrated customer
interface (RJ45, X9/10, SK 520/53xE) the settings in this parameter have no effect.
The DS402 profile cannot be activated.

P552 … -01
CAN cycle time S
… -02
0 … 100 ms In this parameter, the cycle time for the CAN/CANopen master mode and the CAN open encoder
is set (see P503/514/515):
[0]
[01] = Cycle time CAN/CANopen master functions
SW1.6 and above
[02] = Cycle time CANopen absolute value encoder (SK 53xE)
According to the Baud rate set, there are different minimum values for the actual cycle time:
Baud rate Minimum value tZ Default CAN Master Default CANopen Abs.
10kBaud 10ms 50ms 20ms
20kBaud 10ms 25ms 20ms
50kBaud 5ms 10ms 10ms
100kBaud 2ms 5ms 5ms
125kBaud 2ms 5ms 5ms
250kBaud 1ms 5ms 2ms
500kBaud 1ms 5ms 2ms
1000kBaud: 1ms 5ms 2ms
The range of values which can be set is between 0 and 100ms. With the setting 0 “Auto” the
default value (see table) is used. The monitoring function for the CANopen absolute value
encoder no longer triggers at 50ms, but rather at 150ms.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 129


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P554 Min. chopper trigger point S

65 ... 100 % The switching threshold of the brake chopper can be influenced with this parameter. An optimised
value for numerous applications is set in the factory setting. This parameter can be increased for
[ 65 ] applications where pulsating energy is returned (crank drives) to minimise brake resistance power
dissipation.
An increase in this setting leads to a faster overvoltage FI switch off.

P555 Chopper power limit S

5 ... 100 % With this parameter it is possible to program a manual (peak) power limit for the brake resistor.
The switch-on delay (modulation level) for the chopper can only rise to a certain maximum
[ 100 ] specified limit. Once this value has been reached, irrespective of the level of the link voltage, the
inverter switches off the current to the resistor.
The result would be an overvoltage switch-off of the FI.

P556 Braking resistor S

20 ... 400  Value of the brake resistance for the calculation of the maximum brake power to protect the
resistor.
[ 120 ] 2
Once the maximum continuous output (P557) including overload (200% for 60s) is reached, an I t
limit error (E003.1) is triggered. Further details in P737.

P557 Braking resistor power S

0.00 ... 20.00 kW Continuous power (nominal power) of the resistor, to display the actual utilisation in P737. For a
correctly calculated value, the correct value must be entered into P556 and P557.
[ 0.00 ]
0.00 = Monitoring disabled

P558 Magnetizing time S P

0 / 1 / 2 ... 500 ms The ISD control can only function correctly if there is a magnetic field in the motor. For this
reason, a DC current is applied before starting the motor. The duration depends on the size of the
[1] motor and is automatically set in the factory setting of the FI.
For time critical applications, the magnetizing time can be set or deactivated.
0= disabled
1 = automatic calculation
2 ... 500 = Time set in [ms]
NOTE: Setting values that are too low can reduce the dynamics and starting torque.

P559 DC run-on time S P

0.00 ... 30.00 s Following a stop signal and the braking ramp, a direct current is briefly applied to the motor to fully
bring the drive to a stop. Depending on the inertia, the time for which the current is applied can be
[ 0.50 ] set in this parameter.
The current level depends on the previous braking procedure (current vector control) or the static
boost (linear characteristic).

P560 Save on EEPROM S

0 ... 1 0 = Changes to the parameter settings are no longer saved on the EEPROM. All previously
saved settings are retained, even if the FI is disconnected from the mains.
[1]
1 = All parameter changes are automatically written to the EEPROM and remain stored there
even if the FI is disconnected from the mains supply.
NOTE: If BUS communication is used to implement parameter changes, it must be ensured that
the maximum number of write cycles (100,000 x) in the EEPROM is not exceeded.

130 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.7 Positioning

5.7 Positioning
The parameter group P6xx is only included in SK 53xE frequency inverters. These are used to set the
positioning control of the SK 53xE

A detailed description of these parameters can be found in manual BU 0510. (www.nord.com)

5.8 Information

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P700 Current fault


0.0 ... 21.4 Current pending fault. Further details in Section 6 Error messages.
SimpleBox/ControlBox: Descriptions of the individual error numbers can be found in the point
Error messages.
ParameterBox: Errors are displayed in plain text, further information can be found in the point
Error messages.

P701 ... - 01
... Last fault 1...5
... - 05
0.0 ... 21.4 This parameter stores the last 5 faults. Further details in Section 6 Error messages.
The ControlBox must be used to select the corresponding memory location 1...5- (Array
parameter), and confirmed using the ENTER key to read the stored error code.

P702 ... - 01
... Freq. previous fault 1...5 S
... - 05
-400.0 ... 400.0 Hz This parameter stores the output frequency that was being delivered at the time the fault
occurred. The values of the last 5 faults are stored.
The ControlBox must be used to select the corresponding memory location 1...5- (Array
parameter), and confirmed using the ENTER key to read the stored error code.

P703 ... - 01
... Current previous fault 1...5 S
... - 05
0.0 ... 999.9 A This parameter stores the output current that was being delivered at the time the fault occurred.
The values of the last 5 errors are stored.
The ControlBox must be used to select the corresponding memory location 1...5- (Array
parameter), and confirmed using the ENTER key to read the stored error code.

P704 ... - 01
... Voltage previous fault 1...5 S
... - 05
0 ... 500 V AC This parameter stores the output voltage that was being delivered at the time the fault occurred.
The values of the last 5 faults are stored.
The ControlBox must be used to select the corresponding memory location 1...5- (Array
parameter), and confirmed using the ENTER key to read the stored error code.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 131


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P705 ... - 01
... UZW previous fault 1...5 S
... - 05
0 ... 1000 V DC This parameter stores the link voltage that was being delivered at the time the error occurred. The
values of the last 5 errors are stored.
The ControlBox must be used to select the corresponding memory location 1...5- (Array
parameter), and confirmed using the ENTER key to read the stored error code.

P706 ... - 01
... Parameter set previous fault 1...5 S
... - 05
0 ... 3 This parameter stores the parameter set code that was active when the error occurred. Data for
the previous 5 faults are stored.
The ControlBox must be used to select the corresponding memory location 1...5- (Array
parameter), and confirmed using the ENTER key to read the stored error code.

P707 ... - 01
... Software version/ revision
... - 03
0.0 ... 9999.9 This parameter shows the software and revision
numbers in the FI. This can be significant when ... - 01 = Version number (1.7)
different FIs are assigned the same settings. ... - 02 = Revision number (R0)
Array 03 provides information about any special ... - 03 = Special version of
versions of the hardware or software A zero hardware/software (0.0)
stands for the standard version.

P708 Status of digital inputs (SK 520E)

000000000 ... Displays the status of the digital inputs in binary/hexadecimal code. This display can be used to
111111111 (binary) check the input signals.
(Display with
*SK-TU3-PAR)

or Bit 0 = Digital input 1 Bit 5 = Digital input 6 (SK 520/53xE)


0000 ... 01FF (hex) Bit 1 = Digital input 2 Bit 6 = Digital input 7 (SK 520/53xE)
(Display with
*SK-TU3-CTR Bit 2 = Digital input 3 Bit 7 = Digital function analog input 1
*SK-CSX-0)
Bit 3 = Digital input 4 Bit 8 = Digital function analog input 2
Bit 4 = Digital input 5

Bit 11-8 Bit 7-4 Bit 3-0


0000 0000 0000 binary
Minimum value
0 0 0 hex
0001 1111 1111 binary
Maximum value
1 F F hex

ControlBox: the binary Bits are converted into a hexadecimal value and displayed.
ParameterBox: the Bits are displayed increasing from right to left (binary).

P709 Voltage analog input 1


0.00 ... 10.00 V Displays the measured analog input value 1.

P710 Voltage analog output


0.0 ... 10.0 V Displays the delivered value of analog output 1. (0.0 ... 10.0V)

132 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.8 Information

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P711 Output status (SK 520E)

00000000 ... Displays the actual status of the signal relays.


11111111 (binary)
(Display with
*SK-TU3-PAR)

or Bit 0 = Output 1 (K1) Bit 2 = Output 3 (DOUT1)
 only with SK 520/53xE
0000 ... 01FF (hex) Bit 1 = Output 2 (K2) Bit 3 = Output 4 (DOUT2) 
(Display with
*SK-TU3-CTR
*SK-CSX-0)

P712 Voltage analog input 2


0.00 ... 10.00 V Displays the measured analog input value 2.

P714 Operating time


0.10 ... ___ h This parameter shows the time for which the FI was connected to the mains and was ready for
operation.

P715 Enablement time


0.00 ... ___ h This parameter shows the time for which the FI was enabled and supplied current to the output.

P716 Current frequency


-400.0 ... 400.0 Hz Displays the current output frequency.

P717 Current rotation speed


-9999 ... 9999 rpm Displays the actual motor speed calculated by the FI.

P718 ... - 01
... - 02 Current set frequency
... - 03
-400.0 ... 400.0 Hz Displays the frequency specified by the set point. (see also 8.1 Set point processing)
... - 01 = current set frequency from the setpoint source
... - 02 = actual setpoint frequency after processing in the FI status engine
... - 03 = actual setpoint frequency after the frequency ramp

P719 Actual current


0.0 ... 999.9 A Displays the actual output current.

P720 Current torque current


-999.9 ... 999.9 A Displays the actual calculated torque-developing output current (active current). Basis for
calculation are the motor data P201...P209 ... .
 negative values = generator,  positive values = drive

P721 Actual field current


-999.9 ... 999.9 A Displays the actual calculated field current (reactive current). Basis for calculation are the motor
data P201...P209 ... .

P722 Actual voltage


0 ... 500 V Displays the actual AC voltage supplied by the FI output.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 133


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P723 Actual voltage components Ud


0 ... 500 V Displays the actual field voltage component.

P724 Actual voltage components Uq


0 ... 500 V Displays the actual torque voltage component.

P725 Actual cos


0.00 ... 1.00 Displays the actual calculated cos  of the drive.

P726 Apparent power


0.00 ... 99.99 kVA Displays the actual calculated apparent power. Basis for calculation are the motor data
P201...P209 ... .

P727 Mechanic power


-99.99 ... 99.99 kW Displays the actual calculated effective power of the motor. Basis for calculation are the motor
data P201...P209 ... .

P728 Mains voltage


0 ... 1,000 V Displays the actual mains voltage at the FI input.

P729 Torque
0 ... 400 % Displays the actual calculated torque. Basis for calculation are the motor data P201...P209 ... .

P730 Field
0 ... 400 % Displays the actual field in the motor as calculated by the inverter. Basis for calculation are the
motor data P201...P209 ... .

P731 Current parameter set


0 ... 3 Shows the actual operating parameter set.
0 = Parameter set 1 2 = Parameter set 3
1 = Parameter set 2 3 = Parameter set 4

P732 U phase current S

0.0 ... 999.9 A Displays the actual U phase current.


NOTE: This value can deviate somewhat from the value in P719, due to the measurement
procedure used, even with symmetrical output currents.

P733 V phase current S

0.0 ... 999.9 A Displays the actual V phase current.


NOTE: This value can deviate somewhat from the value in P719, due to the measurement
procedure used, even with symmetrical output currents.

134 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.8 Information

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P734 W phase current S

0.0 ... 999.9 A Displays the actual W phase current.


NOTE: This value can deviate somewhat from the value in P719, due to the measurement
procedure used, even with symmetrical output currents.

P735 Rotation speed encoder SK 520E S

-999 ... 9999 rpm Displays the actual rotation speed supplied by the incremental encoder. For this, P301 must be
correctly set.

P736 DC link current


0 ... 1000 V DC Displays the actual link voltage.

P737 Current braking resistor load


0 ... 1000 % This parameter provides information about the actual degree of modulation of the brake chopper
or the current utilisation of the braking resistor in generator mode.
If parameters P556 and P557 are correctly set, the utilisation related to P5567, the resistor power,
is displayed.
If only P556 is correctly set (P557=0), the degree of modulation of the brake chopper is displayed.
Here, 100 means that the brake resistor is fully switched. On the other hand, 0 means that the
brake chopper is not active at present.
If P556 = 0 and P557 = 0, this parameter also provides information about the degree of
modulation of the brake chopper in the FI.

P738 Current motor load


0 ... 1000 % Shows the actual motor load. Basis for calculation is the motor data P203. The actually recorded
current is related to the nominal motor current.

P739 Current heat sink temperature


0 ... 100 Displays the actual FI heat sink temperature.

P740 ... - 01
... Bus In process data S
... - 13
0000 ... FFFF (hex) This parameter informs Control word,
... - 01 = Control Word
about the actual control source from P509.
word and the setpoints that
are transferred via the bus ... - 02 = setpoint value 1
Setpoint data from master
systems. ... - 03 = setpoint value 2
setpoint P510 - 01.
... - 04 = setpoint value 3
For display, a BUS system
must be selected in P509 The displayed value depicts
... - 05 = Bus I/O In Bits (P480) all Bus In Bit sources linked
with OR.
... - 06 = Parameter data In 1 Data during parameter transfer:
... - 07 = Parameter data In 2 Order label (AK),
... - 08 = Parameter data In 3 Parameter number (PNU),
... - 09 = Parameter data In 4 Index (IND),
... - 10 = Parameter data In 5 Parameter value (PWE 1/2)
... - 11 = setpoint value 1 Setpoint data from the leading
... - 12 = setpoint value 2 function value (Broadcast),
... - 13 = setpoint value 3 if P509 = 9/10

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 135


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set
P741 ... - 01
... Bus Out process data S
... - 13
0000 ... FFFF (hex) This parameter informs ... - 01 = Status Word Status word, source from P509.
about the actual status
word and the actual ... - 02 = Actual value 1 (P543)
values that are ... - 03 = Actual value 2 (P544)
transferred via the bus ... - 04 = Actual value 3 (P545)
systems. The displayed value depicts
... - 05 = Bus I/O Out Bit (P481) all Bus Out Bit sources linked
with OR.
... - 06 = Parameter data Out 1
... - 07 = Parameter data Out 2
Data during parameter
... - 08 = Parameter data Out 3
transfer.
... - 09 = Parameter data Out 4
... - 10 = Parameter data Out 5
... - 11 = Actual value 1 leading function
... - 12 = Actual value 2 leading function Actual value of leading
... - 13 = Actual value 3 leading function function P502/P503.

P742 Database version S

0 ... 9999 Displays the internal database version of the FI.

P743 Inverter type


0.25 ... 11.00 Displays the inverter output in kW, e.g. "1.50"  FI with 1.5kW Nominal power.

P744 Configuration level


0000 ... FFFF (hex) This parameter displays the special devices integrated in the FI. Display is in hexadecimal code
(SimpleBox, ControlBox, Bus system).
The display is in plain text when the ParameterBox is used.

SK 500E/505E = 0000
SK 520E = 0101 SK 530E/535E = 0201
SK 510E/511E/515E = 0000

P745 Module version


0.0 ... 999.9 Design status (software version) of the technology unit (SK TU3-xxx), but only when own
processor is present, therefore not for SK TU3-CTR.
Have this data ready if you have a technical query.

P746 Module status S

0000 ... FFFF (hex) Actual status (readiness, error, communication) of the technology unit (SK TU3-xxx), but only
when own processor is present, therefore not for SK TU3-CTR.
Code details can be found in the respective BUS module manual. Different contents are shown
depending on the modules.

P747 Inverter voltage range


0 ... 2 Indicates the mains voltage range for which this device is specified.

0 = 100..0.120V 1 = 200..0.240V 2 = 380...480V

136 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.8 Information

Parameter
Parameter Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set

P748 ... - 01
SK 520E
… Status CANopen and above
S
... - 03
0000 ... FFFF (hex) [01] = CANbus/CANopen Status [02] = reserved [03] = reserved
Bit 0 = 24V Bus supply voltage
Bit 1 = CANbus in status “Bus Warning”
Bit 2 = CANbus in status “Bus Off”
Bit 3 ... 5 = free
Bit 6 = Protocol of the CAN module is
0 = CAN or 1 = CANopen
Bit 7 = free
Bit 8 = „Bootsup Message“ sent
Bit 9 = CANopen NMT State
Bit 10 = CANopen NMT State
Bit 11 = free
Bit 12 ... 14 = reserved
Bit 15 = free

CANopen NMT State Bit 10 Bit 9


Stopped = 0 0
Pre-Operational = 0 1
Operational = 1 0

P750 Overcurrent statistic S

0 ... 9999 Number of overcurrent messages during the operating period P714.

P751 Over voltage statistic S

0 ... 9999 Number of overvoltage messages during the operating period P714.

P752 Mains supply faults S

0 ... 9999 Number of mains faults during the operating period P714.

P753 Overheating statistics S

0 ... 9999 Number of overtemperature faults during the operating period P714.

P754 Parameter loss statistic S

0 ... 9999 Number of parameters lost during the operating period P714.

P755 System faults statistic S

0 ... 9999 Number of system faults during the operating period P714.

P756 Time out statistics S

0 ... 9999 Number of Time out errors during the operating period P714.

P757 Customer faults statistic S

0 ... 9999 Number of Customer Watchdog faults during the operating period P714.
P799 ... - 01
... Operating hours, latest fault 1…5
... - 05
0.1 ... ___ h This parameter shows the operating hours counter status (P714) at the moment of the previous
fault. Array 01…05 corresponds to the lastest fault 1…5.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 137


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

5.9 Parameter monitoring, User settings

(P)  Parameter set dependent, these parameters can be differently adjusted in 4 parameter sets.
S  Supervisor parameter, visibility depends on P003.

Parameter Factory Super- Setting after commissioning


Name
No. setting visor P1 P2 P3 P4
OPERATING DISPLAYS (5.1)
P000 Operating display
P001 Selection display 0
P002 Factor display 1.00 S
0= S parameters are hidden
P003 Supervisor code 1
1= all parameters are visible

BASIC PARAMETERS (5.2)


P100 Parameter set 0 S
P101 Copy parameter set 0 S
P102 (P) Acceleration time [s] 2.0
P103 (P) Deceleration time [s] 2.0
P104 (P) Minimum frequency [Hz] 0.0
P105 (P) Maximum frequency [Hz] 50.0
P106 (P) Ramp smoothing [%] 0 S
P107 (P) Brake reaction time [s] 0.00
P108 (P) Disconnection mode 1 S
P109 (P) DC brake current [%] 100 S
P110 (P) DC braking time on [s] 2.0 S
P111 (P) P factor torque limit [%] 100 S
P112 (P) Torque current limit [%] 401 (off) S
P113 (P) Jog frequency [Hz] 0.0 S
P114 (P) Brake ventilation time [s] 0.00 S
MOTOR DATA / CHARACTERISTIC CURVE PARAMETERS (5.3)
P200 (P) Motor list 0
P201 (P) Nominal motor frequency [Hz] 50.0 * S
P202 (P) Nominal motor speed [rpm] 1385 * S
P203 (P) Nominal motor current [A] 4.8 * S
P204 (P) Nominal motor voltage [V] 230 * S
P205 (P) Nominal motor power [kW] 1.10 *
P206 (P) Motor cos phi 0.78 * S
P207 (P) Motor circuit [star=0/delta=1] 1* S
P208 (P) Stator resistance [] 6.28* S
P209 (P) No load current [A] 3.0 * S
P210 (P) Static boost [%] 100 S
P211 (P) Dynamic boost [%] 100 S
P212 (P) Slip compensation [%] 100 S

138 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.9 Parameter monitoring, User settings

Parameter Factory Super- Setting after commissioning


Name
No. setting visor P1 P2 P3 P4
P213 (P) ISD ctrl loop gain [%] 100 S
P214 (P) Torque precontrol [%] 0 S
P215 (P) Boost precontrol [%] 0 S
P216 (P) Time boost precontrol [s] 0.0 S
P217 (P) Oscillation damping [%] 10 S
P218 (P) Modulation depth [%] 100 S
P219 Auto. excitation [%] 100 S
P220 (P) Parameter identification 0
*) dependent on FI power or P200/P220

CONTROL PARAMETERS (5.4) Encoder input, only SK 520E/530E


P300 (P) Servo Mode [On / Off] 0
P301 Incremental encoder 6
P310 (P) Speed controller P [%] 100
P311 (P) Speed controller I [%/ms] 20
P312 (P) Torque current controller P [%] 200 S
P313 (P) Torque current controller I [%/ms] 125 S
P314 (P) Limit torque current controller [V] 400 S
P315 (P) Field current controller P [%] 200 S
P316 (P) Field current controller I [%/ms] 125 S
P317 (P) Limit field current controller [V] 400 S
P318 (P) Weak field control P [%] 150 S
P319 (P) Weak field control I [%/ms] 20 S
P320 (P) Weak field control limit [%] 100 S
P321 (P) Speed control I brake off 0 S
P325 Encoder function 0
P326 Encoder conversion 1.00
P327 Speed slip error [rpm] 0 (off)
CONTROL TERMINALS (5.5)
P400 Analog input function 1 1
P401 Analog on mode. 1 0 S
P402 Adjustment 1: 0% [V] 0.0 S
P403 Adjustment 1: 100% [V] 10.0 S
P404 Filter analogue input 1 [ms] 100 S
P405 Analog input function 2 0
P406 Mode analog input 2 0 S
P407 Adjustment 2: 0% [V] 0.0 S
P408 Adjustment 2: 100% [V] 10.0 S
P409 Filter analogue input 2 [ms] 100 S
P410 (P) Min. freq. aux. setpoint [Hz] 0.0
P411 (P) Max. freq. aux. setpoint [Hz] 50.0
P412 (P) Nom.val process ctrl [V] 5.0 S

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 139


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter Factory Super- Setting after commissioning


Name
No. setting visor P1 P2 P3 P4
P413 (P) P-component PID control [%] 10.0 S
P414 (P) I-component PID control [%/ms] 10.0 S
P415 (P) D-component PID control [%ms] 1.0 S
P416 (P) Ramp time PI setpoint. [s.] 2.0 S
P417 (P) Offset analog output [V] 0.0 S
P418 (P) Functions: analog output 0
P419 (P) Norm. analogue output [%] 100
P420 Digital input 1 (DIN1) 1
P421 Digital input 2 (DIN2) 2
P422 Digital input 3 (DIN3) 8
P423 Digital input 4 (DIN4) 4
P424 Digital input 5 (DIN5) 0
P425 Digital input 6 (DIN6) 0
P426 (P) Quick stop time [s] 0.10
P427 Emerg. stop error 0 S
P428 (P) Automatic starting 0 (off) S
P429 (P) Fixed frequency 1 [Hz] 0.0
P430 (P) Fixed frequency 2 [Hz] 0.0
P431 (P) Fixed frequency 3 [Hz] 0.0
P432 (P) Fixed frequency 4 [Hz] 0.0
P433 (P) Fixed frequency 5 [Hz] 0.0
P434 (P) Function output 1 (K1) 1
P435 (P) Output 1 standardisation [%] 100
P436 (P) Output 1 hysteresis [%] 10 S
P441 (P) Function output 2 (K2) 7
P442 (P) Output 2 standardisation [%] 100
P443 (P) Output 2 hysteresis [%] 10 S
P450 (P) Output 3 function (DOUT1) 0
P451 (P) Output 3 standardisation [%] 100
P452 (P) Output 3 hysteresis [%] 10 S
P455 (P) Output 4 function (DOUT2) 0
P456 (P) Output 4 standardisation [%] 100
P457 (P) Output 4 hysteresis [%] 10 S
P460 Watchdog time [s] 10.0 S
P461 Function 2 Encoder 0
P462 Pulse number 2 Encoder [Imp.] 1024
P463 2. Encoder conversion 1.00
P465 Fixed frequency, field [-01…-31] 0
P466 (P) Min. process controller freq. 0.0
P470 Digital input 7 (DIN7) 0
P475 Switch-on/off delay [s.] 0.000 S

140 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.9 Parameter monitoring, User settings

Parameter Factory Super- Setting after commissioning


Name
No. setting visor P1 P2 P3 P4
P480 Function Bus I/O In Bits 0 S
P481 Function Bus I/O Out Bits 0 S
P482 Norm. Bus I/O Out Bits [%] 100 S
P483 Hyst. Bus I/O Out Bits [%] 10 S
ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS (5.6)
P502 Leading function value 0 S
P503 Leading function output 0 S
P504 Pulse frequency [kHz] 6.0 S
P505 (P) Abs. minimum frequency [Hz] 2.0 S
P506 Auto. fault acknowledgement. 0 S
P507 PPO Type 1
P508 Profibus address 1
P509 Source control word 0
P510 Setpoint source 0 (auto) S
P511 USS baud rate 3 S
P512 USS address 0
P513 Telegram time-out [s] 0.0 S
P514 CAN baud rate 4
P515 CAN address 50
P516 (P) Skip frequency 1 [Hz] 0.0 S
P517 (P) Skip frequency area 1 [Hz] 2.0 S
P518 (P) Skip frequency 2 [Hz] 0.0 S
P519 (P) Skip frequency area 2 [Hz] 2.0 S
P520 (P) Flying start 0 S
P521 (P) Flying start resolution [Hz] 0.05 S
P522 (P) Flying start offset [Hz] 0.0 S
P523 Factory setting 0
2
P533 Factor I t-Motor [%] 100 S
P534 Torque-based disconn. Limit [%] 401 (off) S
P535 I2t motor 0 S
P536 Current limit 1.5 S
P537 Pulse switch-off [%] 150 S
P538 Mains voltage monitoring 3 S
P539 (P) Output monitoring 0 S
P540 Rotation direction mode 0 S
P541 Set output [hex] 0000 S
P542 Set analog output [V] 0.0 S
P543 (P) Bus - actual value 1 1 S
P544 (P)
Bus - actual value 2 0 S

P545 (P) Bus - actual value 3 0 S


P546 (P) Function Bus - set point 1 1 S

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 141


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter Factory Super- Setting after commissioning


Name
No. setting visor P1 P2 P3 P4
P547 (P) Function Bus - set point 2 0 S
P548 (P) Function Bus - set point 3 0 S
P549 PotentiometerBox function 0 S
P550 ParameterBox Orders 0
P551 Drive profile 0 S
P552 CAN cycle time 0 S
P554 Min. chopper trigger point [%] 65 S
P555 P chopper limit [%] 100 S
P556 Braking resistance [Ω] 120 S
P557 Braking resistance power [kW] 0 S
P558 (P) Magnetisation time [ms] 1 S
P559 (P) DC lag period [s] 0.50 S
P560 Storage in EEPROM 1 S
POSITIONING (5.7) NOTE: Further details are listed and described in
manual BU 0510. (www.nord.com)
P600 (P) Position control 0 (off) S
P601 Actual position [rev] ---
P602 Actual Ref. Pos. [rev] ---
P603 Curr. position. diff. [rev] --- S
P604 Encoder type 0 S
P605 Absolute encoder 10 S
P607 Ratio 1 S
P608 Reduction ratio 1 S
P609 Offset position [rev] 0 S
P610 Sollwert-Modus 0 S
P611 Lageregeler P [%] 5 S
P612 Pos. Window [rev] 0 S
P613 Position [rev] 0 S
P615 Maximum position [rev] 0 S
P616 Minimum position [rev] 0 S
P625 Hysteresis output [rev] 1 S
P626 Relais position [rev] 0 S
P630 Position slip error [rev] 0 S
P631 Abs/Inc slip error [rev] 0 S
P640 Unit of pos. value 0 S

142 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


5.9 Parameter monitoring, User settings

Parameter
Name Actual status and displayed values
No.
INFORMATION (5.8), read only
P700 Current error
P701 Last error 1...5
P702 Freq. previous fault 1...5
P703 Current previous fault 1...5
P704 Voltage previous fault 1...5
P705 UZW previous fault 1...5
P706 P-set last error 1...5
P707 Software version (/-revision)
P708 Status digital input (bin/hex)
P709 Voltage analog input 1 [V]
P710 Voltage analog output [V]
P711 Output status [hex]
P712 Voltage analog input 2 [V]
P714 Operating period [h]
P715 Enable period [h]
P716 Actual frequency [Hz]
P717 Actual speed [rpm]
P718 Actual set frequency 1..3 [Hz]
P719 Actual current [A]
P720 Actual torque current [A]
P721 Actual field current [A]
P722 Actual voltage [V]
P723 Voltage-d [V]
P724 Voltage-q [V]
P725 Actual cos phi
P726 Apparent power [kVA]
P727 Mechanical power [kW]
P728 Input voltage [V]
P729 Torque [%]
P730 Field [%]
P731 Parameter set
P732 U phase current [A]
P733 V phase current [A]
P734 W phase current [A]
P735 Speed encoder [rpm]
P736 Link voltage [V]
Current utilisation of brake resistor
P737
[%]
P738 Actual utilisation of motor [%]
P739 Heat sink temperature [°C]
P740 Process data Bus In [hex]

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 143


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Parameter
Name Actual status and displayed values
No.
INFORMATION (5.8), read only
P741 Process data Bus Out [hex]
P742 Database version
P743 Inverter type
P744 Configuration level
P745 Module version
P746 Module status
P747 Inverter voltage range 230/400V
P748 Status CANopen
P750 Stat. overcurrent
P751 Stat. Overvoltage
P752 Stat. mains failure
P753 Stat. overtemperatur
P754 Stat. parameter loss
P755 Stat. system error
P756 Stat. timeout
P757 Stat. customer error
P799 Error duration 1…5

144 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


6 Error messages

6 Error messages
Errors cause the frequency inverters to switch off, in order to prevent a device fault.
The following options are available to reset an error (acknowledge):
1. Switching the mains off and on again,
2. By an appropriately programmed digital input (P420 ... P425 / P470 = Function 12),
3. By switching of the “enable” on the frequency inverter (if no digital input is programmed for
acknowledgement),
4. By Bus acknowledgement or
5. by P506, automatic error acknowledgement.

Device LEDs: In the delivery condition (without technology unit) 2 LEDs (green/red) are visible externally.
These indicate the current status of the device.
The green LED indicates that the mains voltage is present and operational, while a flashing
code that increases in speed shows the degree of overload at the frequency inverter output.
The red LED signals actual error by flashing with a frequency which corresponds to the
number code of the error (Section. 6.2).

6.1 SimpleBox / ControlBox display


The SimpleBox or ControlBox display an error with its number and the prefix "E". In addition, the actual error
is displayed in parameter P700. The last error messages are stored in parameter P701. Further information on
inverter status when errors occur can be found in parameters P702 to P706 / P799.
If the cause of the error is no longer present, the error display in the SimpleBox/ControlBox flashes and the
error can be acknowledged with the Enter key.

6.2 Table of possible error messages

Display
in the ControlBox Error Cause

Group Detail in text in the Parameter Box  Remedy


P700 / P701

E001 1.0 Inverter overtemperature Error signal from output stage module (static)
 Reduce ambient temperature <50°C (see also Section
7, technical details).
 Check control cabinet ventilation
 Increase ambient temperature, >0°C

E002 2.0 Motor overtemperature Motor temperature sensor has triggered


(PTC resistor)
 Reduce motor load
Only if a digital input is
programmed (Function 13).  Increase motor speed
 Use external motor fan
2.1 Motor overtemperature (I2t) I2t - Motor has triggered
Only if I2t - Motor (P535) is  Reduce motor load
programmed.
 Increase motor speed

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 145


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Display
in the ControlBox Error Cause

Group Detail in text in the Parameter Box  Remedy


P700 / P701
2
E003 3.0 Inverter overcurrent I t limit has triggered, e.g. > 1.5 x In for 60s (please also note
P504)
 Continuous overload at inverter output
2
3.1 Chopper overcurrent U t-limit for brake chopper has triggered
(please also see P554, P555, P556, P557)
 Avoid overcurrent in braking resistance
3.2 Overcurrent IGBT De-rating (power reduction)
monitoring 125%
 125% overcurrent for 50ms
 Brake chopper current too high
 for fan drives: enable flying start circuit See also
(P520) Section 8.5

3.3 Overcurrent IGBT rapid De-rating (power reduction)


monitoring 150%
 150% overcurrent
 Brake chopper current too high

E004 4.0 Overcurrent module Error signal from module (short duration)
 Short circuit or earthing at FI output
 Use external output choke (motor cable is too long)
 Braking resistor defective or too small (See Section 7)
4.1 Overcurrent pulse switch-off P537 (pulse current switch-off) was reached 3x within 50ms
(only possible if P112 and P536 are disabled)
 Fi is overloaded
 Check motor data (P201 … P209)

E005 5.0 Overvoltage link circuit FI link voltage is too high


 Reduce energy return by means of a braking resistance
 Extend braking time (P103)
 If necessary, set switch-off mode (P108) with delay (not
for lifting equipment)
 Extend emergency stop time (P426)
5.1 Overvoltage mains Mains voltage is too high
 Please check 380V-20% ... 480V+10%
or 200 ... 240V  10%

E006 6.0 Link circuit undervoltage Inverter mains/link voltage too low
(charging error) )
 Check mains voltage 380V-20% ... 480V+10%
6.1 Mains undervoltage or 200 ... 240V  10%

E007 7.0 Mains phase failure One of the three mains input phases was or is interrupted.
 Check mains phases 380V-20% ... 480V+10%
or 200 ... 240V  10%, possibly too low?
 All three mains phases must be symmetrical.
OFF NOTE: OFF appears in the display when the three mains phases are uniformly reduced,
i.e. when a normal mains switch off occurs during operation.

146 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


6 Error messages

Display
in the ControlBox Error Cause

Group Detail in text in the Parameter Box  Remedy


P700 / P701

E008 8.0 EEPROM parameter loss Error in EEPROM data


(maximum value exceeded) )
 Software version of the stored data set not compatible
with the software version of the FI.
NOTE: Faulty parameters are automatically reloaded
(factory setting).
 EMC interferences (see also E020)
8.1 Invalid inverter type  EEPROM faulty
8.2 External EEPROM copy error  Check ControlBox for correct position.
(ControlBox)
 ControlBox EEPROM faulty (P550 = 1).
8.3 Customer interface
incorrectly identified
(customer’s interface equipment) The upgrade level of the frequency inverter was not correctly
identified.
8.4 Database version incorrect
 Switch mains voltage off and on again.
8.7 Original and mirror not
identical

E009 --- ControlBox error/ SPI Bus faulty, no communication with ControlBox /
SimpleBox error SimpleBox.
 Check ControlBox for correct position.
 Check correct cabling of SimpleBox.
 Switch mains voltage off and on again.

E010 10.0 Telegram downtime Data transfer is faulty. Check P513


 Check external Bus connection.
 Check Bus Protocol program process.
 Check Bus master.
 Check 24V supply of internal CAN/CANopen Bus.
 Nodeguarding error (internal CANopen)
 Bus Off error (internal CAN Bus)
10.2 External bus module Telegram transfer is faulty.
telegram time-out
 Check external connection.
 Check Bus Protocol program process.
 Check Bus master.
10.4 External bus module  Check P746.
initialisation failure
 Bus module not correctly plugged in.
 Check Bus module current supply.
10.1 External Bus module system
failure
10.3
Further details can be found in the respective additional BUS
10.5
operating instructions.
10.6
10.7
10.8 External module  Connection fault / error in the external component
communication failure
 Brief interruption (<1sec) of the 24V supply of the
internal CAN/CANopen bus

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 147


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Display
in the ControlBox Error Cause

Group Detail in text in the Parameter Box  Remedy


P700 / P701

E011 11.0 Customer unit Internal customer unit (internal databus) faulty or damaged by
radio radiation (EMC)
(AnalogDigital converter error)
 Check control terminals connection for short-circuit.
 Minimize EMC interference by laying control and power
cables separately.
 Earth the devices and shields well.

E012 12.0 Watchdog customer / The Watchdog function is selected at a digital input and the
customer error impulse at the corresponding digital input is not present for
longer than the time set in parameter P460 >Watchdog time<.
12.1 Drive switch-off limit The drive switch-off limit P534 [01] has triggered.
exceeded
 Reduce load on motor
 Set a higher value in P534 [01].
12.2 Generator switch-off value The generator switch-off limit P534 [02] has triggered.
exceeded
 Reduce load on motor
 Set a higher value in P534 [02].

E013 13.0 Encoder error No signal from encoder


 Check 5V sensor if available.
 Check supply voltage of encoder.
13.1 Speed slip error The slip speed error limit was reached.
 Increase setting in P327.
13.2 Slip error switch-off The slip error monitoring was triggered; the motor could not
monitoring follow the setpoint.
 Check motor data P201-P209! This data is very
important for the current control
 Check motor circuit.
 If necessary, check the encoder setting P3xx in
Servo mode.
 Increase setting value for torque limit in P112.
 Increase setting value for current limit in P536.

E016 16.0 Motor phase error A motor phase is not connected.


 Check P539
 Check motor connections
16.1 Motor current monitoring for Required exciting current not achieved at moment of switch-
braking mode on.
 Check P539
 Check motor connections

E018 18.0 Safety circuit The safe pulse block was triggered while the frequency
inverter was being enabled.
 Only available in SK 51xE and SK 53xE. Details in
manual BU 0530 (www.nord.com).

148 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


6 Error messages

Display
in the ControlBox Error Cause

Group Detail in text in the Parameter Box  Remedy


P700 / P701

E019 19.0 Parameter identification error Automatic identification of the connected motor was
unsuccessful
19.1 Motor star/delta circuit is not
correct  Check motor connections
 Check pre-set motor data (P201 ... P209)

E020 20.0 reserved

E021 20.1 Watchdog


20.2 Stack overflow
20.3 Stack underflow
20.4 Undefined opcode
20.5 Protected Instruction System error in program execution, triggered by EMC
interference.
20.6 Illegal word access
Please comply with wiring guidelines in Section 2.6.
20.7 Illegal instruction access
Use additional external mains filter. (Section. 8.3 / 8.4 EMC)
20.8 EPROM error
FI must be very well "earthed".
20.9 reserved
21.0 NMI error (not used by
hardware)
21.1 PLL Error
21.2 ADU Overrun
21.3 PMI Access Error

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 149


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

7 Technical data
7.1 SK 500E: General Data

Function Specification
Output frequency 0.0 ... 400.0Hz
Pulse frequency 3.0 ... 16.0kHz, standard setting = 6kHz
Power reduction > 8kHz for 230V device, >6kHz for 400V device.
Typical overload capacity 150% for 60s, 200% for 3.5s
Protective measures against Over-heating of the frequency inverter, Short-circuit, earthing fault,
overvoltage and undervoltage overload, idling
Regulation and control Non-sensor vector current control (ISD), linear V/f characteristic
Analog setpoint input / PID input 2x (S5 and 6: - 10V…) 0...10V, 0/4...20mA, scalable, digital 7.5...30V
Analog setpoint resolution 10 bit based on measurement range
Analog output 0 ... 10V scalable
Setpoint consistency Analog < 1% Digital < 0.02%
2
Motor temperature monitoring: I t-Motor (UL approval), PTC / Bi-metal switch (no UL approval)
Digital input 5x (2.5V) 7.5...30V, Ri = (2.2k) 6.1k, cycle time = 1...2ms
in addition, with SK 52xE/53xE: 2x 7.5...30V, Ri = 6.1k, cycle time = 1...2ms
Electrical isolation Control terminals (digital and analog inputs)
Control outputs 2x relay 28V DC / 230V AC, 2A (output 1/2 - K1/K2)
in addition, with SK 520E/530E: 2x digital outputs 15V, 20mA or
in addition, with SK 535E: 2x digital outputs 18…30V (according to VI), 20mA, or
2x digital outputs 30V, 200mA from S5
(output 3/4 - DOUT1/2)
Interfaces Standard: RS 485 (USS) Option: Profibus DP
RS 232 (single slave) InterBus
CANbus (except SK 50xE) CANopen
CANopen (except SK 50xE) DeviceNet
AS Interface
Efficiency of frequency inverter ca. 95% according to size
Ambient temperature 0 ... +40°C (S1-100% ED), 0°C ... +50°C (S3-70% ED 10min)
Storage and transport temperature -20°C ... +60 /70
Long-term storage Connect the frequency inverter to the mains voltage for 60 minutes at the latest
after one year. Maintain this cycle throughout the storage period.
Protection class IP20
Max. mounting altitude above sea up to 1000m: No power reduction
level
1000...4000m: 1%/ 100m power reduction (up to 2000m overvoltage cat. 3)
2000...4000m: Only overvoltage category 2 is maintained, external overvoltage
protection at the mains input is necessary
Waiting period between
60 sec for all devices in normal operating cycle
two power-up cycles
Mains/motor/brake resist. According to size Details /
25mm2 flexible with wiring sleeves, Terminal screw
35mm2 with rigid cable tightening torque
Control unit 1.0mm2 with wiring sleeves 0.5...0.6Nm:
Connection
terminals Relay 1 / 2 1.5mm2 with wiring sleeves (S 1 – 4) see Section
4.0mm2 with wiring sleeves (S 5 – 6) 2.11
RS485 / RS232 1x RJ12 (6-pin)
CANbus / CANopen 2x RJ45 (8-pin) (except SK 50xE and SK510E)
External supply voltage, S 1-4: 18…30V DC, min. 800mA
control unit SK 5x5E S 5-6: 24…30V DC, min. 1000mA

150 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


7 Technical data

7.2 Electrical data 115V

Size 1
Device type: SK 5xxE… -250-112-O -370-112-O -550-112-O -750-112-O

Nominal motor power 230V 0.25 kW 0.37 kW 0.55 kW 0.75 kW


1
(4–pole standard motor) 240V /3 hp ½ hp ¾ hp 1 hp
Mains phases Number 1 AC
Mains voltage 1~ 115V 110 ... 120V,  10%, 47 ... 63Hz
Output voltage 3~ 230V 3 AC 0 – 220 ... 240V
Nominal output current at 230V rms [A] 1.7 2.2 3.0 4.0
Min. braking resistor Accessories 240  190  140  100 
1 AC
Typical current at 230V 8A 10 A 13 A 18 A
rms [A]
1 AC
Rec. mains fuse 16 A 16 A 16 A 20 A
slow-blow [A]
Fan cooling (temperature-controlled)
Type of ventilation Free convection Switching thresholds:
ON= 57°C OFF=47°C
Weight approx. [kg] 1.4

7.3 Electrical data 230V

Size 1
Device type: SK 5xxE… -250-323-A -370-323-A -550-323-A -750-323-A

Nominal motor power 230V 0.25 kW 0.37 kW 0.55 kW 0.75 kW


1
(4–pole standard motor) 240V /3 hp ½ hp ¾ hp 1 hp
Mains phases Number 1 / 3 AC
Mains voltage 200 ... 240V,  10%, 47 ... 63 Hz
Output voltage 3 AC 0 - Mains voltage
Nominal output current at 230V rms [A] 1.7 2.2 3.0 4.0
Min. braking resistor Accessories 240  190  140  100 
1 / 3 AC
Typical current at 230V 3.7 / 2.4 4.8 / 3.1 6.5 / 4.2 8.7 / 5.6
rms [A]
1 / 3 AC
Rec. mains fuse 10 / 10 10 / 10 16 / 10 16 / 10
slow-blow [A]
Type of ventilation Free convection
Weight approx. [kg] 1.4

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 151


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Size 2 / 3
Device type: SK 5xxE… -111-323-A -151-323-A -221-323-A -301-323-A -401-323-A

Nominal motor power 230V 1.1 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW 3.0 kW 4.0 kW


(4–pole standard motor) 240V 1½ hp 2 hp 3 hp 4 hp 5 hp
Mains phases Number 1 / 3 AC 3 AC
Mains voltage 200 ... 240V,  10%, 47 ... 63 Hz
Output voltage 3 AC 0 - Mains voltage
Nominal output current at 230V rms [A] 5.5 7.0 9.0 12.5 16.0
min. brake resistor Accessories 75  62  46  35  26 
1 / 3 AC
Typical input current at 230V 12.0 / 7.7 15.2 / 9.8 19.6 / 13.3 17.5 22.4
rms [A]
1 / 3 AC
Recommended mains fuse 16 / 16 20 / 16 25 / 20 20 25
slow-blowing [A]
Fan cooling (temperature-controlled)
Type of ventilation Switching thresholds:
ON= 57°C OFF=47°C
Weight approx. [kg] 1.8 2.7

Size 5 / 6
Device type: SK 5x5E… -551-323-A -751-323-A -112-323-A
Nominal motor power 230V 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 11.0 kW
(4–pole standard
240V 7½ hp 10 hp 15 hp
motor)
Mains phases Number 3 AC
Mains voltage 200 ... 240V,  10%, 47 ... 63 Hz
Output voltage 3 AC 0 - Mains voltage
Nominal output
rms [A] 20.0 27.0 40.0
current at 230V
min. brake resistor Accessories 19  14  10 

Typical input current 3 AC


28.0 38.0 56.0
at 230V rms [A]

Recommended 3 AC
35 50 63
mains fuse slow-blowing [A]
Fan cooling (temperature-controlled)
Type of ventilation Switching thresholds:
ON= 57°C OFF=47°C
Weight approx. [kg] 8 10.3

152 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


7 Technical data

7.4 Electrical data 400V

Size 1 / 2
Device type: SK 5xxE… -550-340-A -750-340-A -111-340-A -151-340-A -221-340-A

Nominal motor power 400V 0.55 kW 0.75 kW 1.1 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW


(4–pole standard motor) 480V ¾ hp 1 hp 1½ hp 2 hp 3 hp
Mains phases Number 3 AC
Mains voltage 380 ... 480V, -20% / +10%, 47 ... 63 Hz
Output voltage 3 AC 0 - Mains voltage
Nominal output current at 400V rms [A] 1.7 2.3 3.1 4.0 5.5
Min. braking resistor Accessories 390  300  220  180  130 
Typical input current at 400V rms [A] 2.4 3.2 4.3 5.6 7.7
Recommended mains fuse slow-blowing [A] 10 10 10 10 10
Fan cooling (temperature-
controlled)
Type of ventilation Free convection
Switching thresholds:
ON= 57°C OFF=47°C
Weight approx. [kg] 1.4 1.8

Size 3 / 4
Device type: SK 5xxE… -301-340-A -401-340-A -551-340-A -751-340-A

Nominal motor power 400V 3.0 kW 4.0 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW


(4–pole standard motor) 480V 4 hp 5 hp 7½ hp 10 hp
Mains phases Number 3 AC
Mains voltage 380 ... 480V, -20% / +10%, 47 ... 63 Hz
Output voltage 3 AC 0 - Mains voltage
Nominal output current at 400V rms [A] 7.5 9.5 12.5 16.0
min. brake resistor Accessories 91  75  56  43 
Typical input current at 400V rms [A] 10.5 13.3 17.5 22.4
Recommended mains fuse slow-blowing [A] 16 16 20 25
Fan cooling (temperature-controlled)
Type of ventilation Switching thresholds:
ON= 57°C OFF=47°C
Weight approx. [kg] 2.7 3.1

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 153


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Size 5 / 6
Device type: SK 5x5E… -112-340-A -152-340-A -182-340-A -222-340-A

Nominal motor power 400V 11.0 kW 15.0 kW 18.0 kW 22.0 kW


(4–pole standard motor) 480V 15 hp 20 hp 25 hp 30 hp
Mains phases Number 3 AC
Mains voltage 380 ... 480V, -20% / +10%, 47 ... 63 Hz
Output voltage 3 AC 0 - Netzspannung
Nominal output current at 400V rms [A] 23.0 30.0 37.0 45.0
min. brake resistor Accessories 29  23  18  15 
Typical input current at 400V rms [A] 32.0 42.0 52.0 63.0
Recommended mains fuse slow-blowing [A] 35 50 63 63
Fan cooling (temperature-controlled)
Type of ventilation Switching thresholds:
ON= 57°C OFF=47°C
Weight approx. [kg] 8 10.3

7.5 Electrical data for UL certification


The data given in this section must be taken into account to comply with UL certification.
“Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 5000 rms symmetrical Amperes, 120 Volts
maximum (SK 5xxE-xxx-112), 240 Volts maximum (SK 5xxE-xxx-323), or 480 Volts maximum (SK 5xxE-xxx-
340), or 500 Volts maximum (SK 5xxE-xxx-350) and minimum one of the two following alternatives.”

Electrical data 115V

Size 1 - 115V mains


Device type: SK 5xxE… -250-112-O -370-112-O -550-112-O -750-112-O

Nominal motor power 110V 0.25 kW 0.37 kW 0.55 kW 0.75 kW


1
(4–pole standard motor) 120V /3 hp ½ hp ¾ hp 1 hp
FLA 1 AC [A] 7.7 A 9.5 A 12.5 A 17.3 A

Recommended J Class Fuse, 600V 10 A 13 A 20 A 25 A


mains fuse Bussmann B or G LPJ-10SP LPJ-13SP LPJ-20SP LPJ-25SP

154 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


7 Technical data

Electrical data 230V

Size 1 - 230V mains


Device type: SK 5xxE… -250-323-A -370-323-A -550-323-A -750-323-A

Nominal motor power 220V 0.25 kW 0.37 kW 0.55 kW 0.75 kW


1
(4–pole standard motor) 240V /3 hp ½ hp ¾ hp 1 hp
FLA 3 / 1 AC [A] 3/4 4/5 5/7 6/9
J Class Fuse, 600V 2½ A / 4 A 3½ A / 5 A 4½ A / 7 A 6A/9A
Recommended
mains fuse LPJ-2½SP / LPJ-3½SP / LPJ-4½SP / LPJ-6SP /
Bussmann B or G
LPJ-4SP LPJ-5SP LPJ-7SP LPJ-9 SP

Size 2 / 3 – 230V mains


Device type: SK 5xxE… -111-323-A -151-323-A -221-323-A -301-323-A -401-323-A

Nominal motor power 220V 1.1 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW 3.0 kW 4.0 kW


(4–pole standard motor) 240V 1½ hp 2 hp 3 hp 4 hp 5 hp
FLA 3 / 1 AC [A] 8 / 12 10 / 15 13 / 19 17 21
J Class Fuse, 600V 8 /13 A 10 A / 17½ A 15 A / 20 A 17½ A / - 25 A / -
Recommended
mains fuse LPJ-8SP / LPJ-10SP / LPJ-15SP /
Bussmann B or G LPJ-17½SP / - LPJ-25SP / -
LPJ-13SP LPJ-17½SP LPJ-20SP

Size 5 / 6 – 230V mains


Device type: SK 5xxE… -551-323-A -751-323-A -112-323-A
Nominal motor power 220V 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 11,0 kW
(4–pole standard motor) 240V 7½ hp 10 hp 15 hp
FLA 3 / 1 AC [A]

Recommended J Class Fuse, 600V


mains fuse Bussmann B or G

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 155


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

Electrical data 400V

Size 1 / 2 - 400V Netz


Device type: SK 5xxE… -550-340-A -750-340-A -111-340-A -151-340-A -221-340-A

Nominal motor power 380V 0.55 kW 0.75 kW 1.1 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW


(4–pole standard motor) 460…480V ¾ hp 1 hp 1½ hp 2 hp 3 hp
FLA 3 AC [A] 3 4 5 6 8

Recommended J Class Fuse, 600V 2½A 3½A 4½A 6A 8A


mains fuse Bussmann B or G LPJ-2 ½ SP LPJ-3 ½ SP LPJ-4 ½ SP LPJ-6 SP LPJ-8 SP

Size 3 / 4 - 400V Netz


Device type: SK 5xxE… -301-340-A -401-340-A -551-340-A -751-340-A

Nominal motor power 380V 3.0 kW 4.0 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW


(4–pole standard motor) 460…480V 4 hp 5 hp 7½ hp 10 hp
FLA 3 AC [A] 11 13 17 21

Recommended J Class Fuse, 600V 12 A 15 A 20 A 25 A


mains fuse Bussmann B or G LPJ-12 SP LPJ-15 SP LPJ- 20 SP LPJ-25 SP

Size 5 / 6 - 400V Netz


Device type: SK 5xxE… -112-340-A -152-340-A -182-340-A -222-340-A
Nominal motor power 380V 11.0 kW 15.0 kW 18.5 kW 22.0 kW
(4–pole standard motor) 460…480V 15 hp 20 hp 25 hp 30 hp
FLA 3 AC [A]

Recommended J Class Fuse, 600V


mains fuse Bussmann B or G

156 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


7 Technical data

7.6 General conditions for ColdPlate technology


The standard frequency inverter is supplied with a smooth flat mounting surface
instead of a heat sink. This means that the FI must be cooled via the mounting
surface, but has a low installation depth.
For all devices there is no fan.
In the selection of a suitable cooling system (e.g. liquid-cooled mounting plate)
the thermal resistance Rth and the heat to be dissipated from the PV modulus of
the frequency inverter must be taken into account. For example, the supplier of
the appropriate control cabinet system can provide details for the correct
selection of the mounting plate.
The mounting plate has been correctly selected if its Rth value is less than the
values stated below.

NOTE: Before the device is fitted to the mounting plate, any protective film
must be removed. A suitable heat-conducting paste must be used.

1~ 115V- devices Pv modulus [W] Max. Rth [K/W]


SK 5xxE-250-112-O-CP 8.51 3.29
SK 5xxE-370-112-O-CP 11.29 2.48
SK 5xxE-550-112-O-CP 15.98 1.75
SK 5xxE-750-112-O-CP 22.27 1.26

1/3~ 230V devices Pv modulus [W] Max. Rth [K/W]


SK 5xxE-250-323-A-CP 10.48 2.67
SK 5xxE-370-323-A-CP 14.11 1.98
SK 5xxE-550-323-A-CP 20.38 1.37
SK 5xxE-750-323-A-CP 29.09 0.96
SK 5xxE-111-323-A-CP 44.04 0.48
SK 5xxE-151-323-A-CP 55.08 0.38
SK 5xxE-221-323-A-CP * 67.96 0.31
SK 5xxE-301-323-A-CP 83.37 0.25
SK 5xxE-401-323-A-CP 113.88 0.18

*) NOTE: In contrast to the standard device, SK 500E-221-323-A-CP for S1 operation can


only be supplied in size 3.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 157


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

3~ 400V- devices Pv modulus [W] Max. Rth [K/W]


SK 5xxE-550-340-A-CP 11.88 2.36
SK 5xxE-750-340-A-CP 16.57 1.69
SK 5xxE-111-340-A-CP 23.22 1.21
SK 5xxE-151-340-A-CP 31.24 0.90
SK 5xxE-221-340-A-CP 45.91 0.46
SK 5xxE-301-340-A-CP 64.60 0.33
SK 5xxE-401-340-A-CP 86.61 0.24
SK 5xxE-551-340-A-CP 101.73 0.21
SK 5xxE-751-340-A-CP 134.95 0.16

The following points must be complied with to ensure the Rth:


 The maximum heat sink temperature (Tkk) of 80°C and the maximum internal temperature of the control
cabinet (Tamb) of 40°C must not be exceeded.
 The ColdPlate and the mounting plate must lie flat against each other (max.air gap 0.05mm).
 The contact area of the mounting plate must be at least as large as the area of the ColdPlate
 A suitable heat conducting paste must be applied between the ColdPlate and the mounting plate.
The heat conducting paste is not included in the scope of delivery! First remove any protective film.
 All screw connections must be tightened.
 When designing a cooling system the heat to be dissipated by the ColdPlate device, Pv-modulus must be
taken into account. For the design of the control cabinet the heat production of the device of approx 5% of
the nominal power must be taken into consideration.

In case of any further queries, please contact Getriebebau NORD.

158 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


7 Technical data

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 159


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

8 Additional information

8.1 Setpoint processing in the SK 500E

Main
setpoint sources
Frequency main setpoint
Funct. digital input:
Direction of rotation

Fixed frequency 1-5 P429-P433


Jog frequency P113
(also with ControlBox) Scaling
Scaling P105
Analog input 1 P400-P404
+
Scaling
Analog input 2
P405-P409 P104
P509
ControlBox / P549
+ ±1
PotentiometerBox Interface

P546-P548
Bus setpoint 1,2,3

Auxiliary Auxiliary setpoint standardisation


setpoint sources Frequency addition /
Frequency subtraction
Scaling P400
Analog input 1 P400-P404 Scaling

Scaling
Analog input 2 P411 P405
P405-P409
P549 P549
PotentiometerBox
P410 P547
Bus setpoint 2 Bus selection

Bus setpoint 3 P510 P548

P325
Inc

160 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


8 Additional information

Limitation
Auxiliary
Masking Min/Max- Frequency Current
setpoint
frequencies limitation ramp limit
function
fs fs
P105 P112 SETPOINT
PID
f t
controller
P102,P103
FREQUENCY
- P413- P516- P111
- P104 P106,P107
P416 P519 P536,P537
fIST P505 P108,P114

fmax mmax Imax

Frequency setpoint

Maximum frequency
Torque limit
Current limit

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 161


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

8.2 Process controller


The process controller is a PI controller which can be used to limit the controller output. In addition, the output
is scaled as a percentage of a master setpoint. This provides the option of controlling any downstream drives
with the master setpoint and readjusting using the PI controller.

Ramp PID controller P416

Reference
setpoint
) Analog input 1
(P400=4) Min. limitation
) or P466
) Analog input 2

Setpoint
) P412 (0.0-10.0V) Acceleration
P-Factor P413 time P102
I-Factor P414
x1

X + +
+ x2 y

x1*x2
y=
Actual value - PI controller
100 % Setpoint ramp

Analog input 1 Max. limitation


(P400=14) P415 Lead
or Analog input
Analog input 2 (P400 = 16)

Fig.: Flow diagram process controller

8.2.1 Process controller application example


Controlled drive via CR Compensating roller = CR (dancer roller) Pilot machine

0V
M M

M M

Centre 5V
nominal
Actual position
position
of CR via 10V
potentiometer
0-10V

Frequency inverter
f
Setpoint of pilot machine AIN 1
Controller
limit P415 in
Enabled right DIN 1 % of setpoint

Controller
Actual position CR AIN 2 limit P415
Setpoint of
pilot machine
Nominal position CR
via parameter P412 t

162 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


8 Additional information

8.2.2 Process controller parameter settings

(Example: setpoint frequency: 50 Hz, control limits: +/- 25%)

 Setpointfrq. Hz  P415 %  


P105 (maximum frequency) [Hz] :  Setpointfrq. Hz     
 100% 

50 Hz  25%
Example:  50 Hz   62.5Hz
100%

P400 (Funct. analog input) : “4” (frequency addition)


P411 (setpoint frequency) [Hz] : Set frequency with 10 V at analog input 1

Example: 50 Hz

P412 (Process controller setpoint) : CR middle position / Default setting 5V V (adapt if necessary)
P413 (P controller) [%] : Default setting 10% (adapt if necessary)
P414 (I-controller) [% / ms] : recommended 100%/s
P415 (limitation +/-) [%] : Controller limitation (see above)
Note: In the function process controller, parameter P415 is used as a
controller limiter downstream from the PI controller. This
parameter therefore has a double function.
Example: 25% of setpoint

P416 (ramp before controller) [s] : Default setting 2s (if necessary, adjust to controller behaviour)
P420 (Funct. digital input 1) : “1” Enable right
P405 (Funct. Analoginput 2) : "14" actual value PID process controller

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 163


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

8.3 Electromagnetic compatibility Abbreviation: EMC)

All electrical equipment that have an intrinsic, independent function and are placed on the market as individual
units for users from January 1996 must comply with the EEC directive EEC/89/336EEC . There are three
different ways for manufacturers to display compliance with this directive:

1. EC declaration of conformity
This is a declaration from the manufacturer stating that the requirements in the applicable European standards for the
electrical environment of the equipment have been met. Only those standards which are published in the Official
Journal of the European Community can be cited in the manufacturer’s declaration.
2. Technical documentation
Technical documentation can be produced which describes the EMC characteristics of the device. This documentation
must be authorised by one of the “Responsible bodies” named by the responsible European government. This makes it
possible to use standards that are still under preparation.
3. EC type test certificate (This method only applies to radio transmitter equipment.)
SK 500E frequency inverters only have an intrinsic function when they are connected to other equipment (e.g. with a
motor). The base units cannot therefore carry the CE mark that would confirm compliance with the EMC directive.
Precise details are therefore given below about the EMC behaviour of this product, based on the proviso that it is
installed according to the guidelines and instructions described in this documentation.

Class A, Group 2: General, for industrial environments


Complies with the EMC standard for power drives EN 61800-3, for use in secondary environments (industrial) and
if not generally available.

Class A, Group 1: Interference suppressed, for industrial environments


In this operating class, the manufacturer can certify that his equipment meets the requirements of the EMC directive for
industrial environments with respect to their EMC behaviour in power drives. The limit values correspond to the basic
standards EN 61000--62 and EN 61000-6-4 for interference immunity and interference emissions in industrial
environments.

Class B, Group 1: Interference suppressed for domestic, commercial and light industry environments
In this operating class, the manufacturer can certify that his equipment meets the requirements of the EMC directive for
domestic, commercial and light industry environments with respect to their EMC behaviour in power drives. The limit
values correspond to the basic standards EN 61000--62 and EN 61000-6-4 for interference immunity and interference
emissions.

ATTENTION
NORDAC SK 500E Frequency inverters are intended exclusively for commercial use.
They are therefore not subject to the requirements of the standard EN 61000-3-2 for
radiation of harmonics.
This device produces high frequency interference, which may make additional
suppression measures necessary in domestic environments. (Details in Section 8.4)

8.4 EMC limit value classes


Please note that these limit value classes are only reached if the standard pulse frequency (6kHz) is being
used and the length of the shielded motor cable does not exceed the permissible limits.
In addition, it is essential to use wiring suitable for EMC. The motor cable shielding must be applied on both
sides (frequency inverter shield angle and the metal motor terminal box).

164 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


8 Additional information

Jumper position Cable emissions 150kHz - 30 MHz


Device type
Max. motor cable, shielded See Section
2.8.6 - 2.8.7 Class A 1 Class B 1

2-1 20m 5m
SK 5xxE-250-323-A … SK 5xxE-401-323-A
2-2 5m -
2-1 20m 5m
SK 5xxE-550-340-A … SK 5xxE-751-340-A
2-2 5m -

Overview of the standards, which according to product standard EN 61800-3 are applicable as testing and
measuring methods for electric drives whose speed can be altered:

Interference emission

Emission from cables A1


EN 55011
(interference voltage) B1

Radiated emissions A1
EN 55011
(Interference field strength) -
Interference immunity EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-2
ESD, discharge of static electricity EN 61000-4-2 6kV (CD), 8kV (AD)

EMF, high frequency electro-magnetic


EN 61000-4-3 10V/m; 80 - 1000MHz
fields

Burst on control cables EN 61000-4-4 1kV

Burst on mains and motor cables EN 61000-4-4 2kV

Surge (phase-phase / phase-ground) EN 61000-4-5 1kV / 2kV

Cable-led interference due to high


EN 61000-4-6 10V, 0.15 - 80MHz
frequency fields

Voltage fluctuations and drops EN 61000-2-1 +10%, -15%; 90%

Voltage asymmetries and frequency


EN 61000-2-4 3%; 2%
changes

Wiring recommendations

Braking resistor
(Accessories)
Shield angle

B+ B-

L1 U

M
L1 U
200-240V
or L 2 /N L2 V
380-480V V

3~
50-60Hz L3 L3 W
W
PE PE PE

SK 5xxE

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 165


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

8.5 Reduced output power


The SK 5xxE frequency inverter series is designed for certain overload situations. For example, 1.5x
overcurrent can be used for 60 sec. For approx. 3.5 sec a 2x overcurrent is possible. A reduction of the
overload capacity or its time must be taken into account in the following circumstances:
o Output frequencies < 2Hz and constant voltages (needle stationary)
o Pulse frequencies greater than the nominal pulse frequency (P504)
o Increased mains voltage > 400V
o Increased heat sink temperature
On the basis of the following characteristic curves, the particular current / power limitation can be read off.

8.5.1 Increased heat dissipation due to pulse frequency


This illustration shows how the output current must be reduced, depending on the pulse frequency for 230V
and 400V devices, in order to avoid excessive heat dissipation in the frequency inverter.
For 400V devices, the reduction begins at a pulse frequency above 6kHz. For 230V devices, the reduction
begins at a pulse frequency above 8kHz.
Even with increased pulse frequencies the frequency inverter is capable of supplying its maximum peak
current, however only for a reduced period of time. The diagram shows the possible current load capacity for
continuous operation.

I / IN 1.2
1.2

1.1

0.9
k 400V f puls
0.8
k 230V f puls

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4 0.4
4 6 8 10 12 14 16
3 f puls Pulse frequency [kHz]
16

166 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


8 Additional information

8.5.2 Reduced overcurrent due to time


The possible overload capacity changes depending on the duration of an overload. Several values are cited in
this table. If one of these limiting values is reached, the frequency inverter must have sufficient time (with low
utilisation or without load) in order to regenerate itself.
If operated repeatedly in the overload region at short intervals, the limiting values stated in the tables are
reduced.

230V devices: Reduced overload capacity (approx.) due to pulse frequency (P504) and time
Time [s]
Pulse frequency [kHz]
> 600 60 30 20 10 3.5
3...8 110% 150% 170% 180% 180% 200%
10 103% 140% 155% 165% 165% 180%
12 96% 130% 145% 155% 155% 160%
14 90% 120% 135% 145% 145% 150%
16 82% 110% 125% 135% 135% 140%

400V devices: Reduced overload capacity (approx.) due to pulse frequency (P504) and time
Time [s]
Pulse frequency [kHz]
> 600 60 30 20 10 3.5
3...6 110% 150% 170% 180% 180% 200%
8 100% 135% 150% 160% 160% 165%
10 90% 120% 135% 145% 145% 150%
12 78% 105% 120% 125% 125% 130%
14 67% 92% 104% 110% 110% 115%
16 57% 77% 87% 92% 92% 100%

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 167


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

8.5.3 Reduced overcurrent due to output frequency


To protect the power unit at low output frequencies (<4.5Hz) a monitoring system is provided, with which the
temperature of the IGBTs (integrated gate bipolar transistor) due to high current is determined. In order to
prevent current being taken off above the limit shown in the diagram, a pulse switch-off (P537) with a variable
limit is introduced. At a standstill, with 6kHz pulse frequency, current above 1.1x the nominal current cannot be
taken off.

I / IN 2.5
Prohibited region
2

x( f )
1.5
In_60sec( f )

In_1sec( f) 1

0.5

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
f
Output frequency [Hz]

The upper limiting values for the various pulse frequencies can be obtained from the following tables. In all
cases, the value (0.1…1.9) which can be set in parameter P537, is limited to the value stated in the tables
according to the pulse frequency. Values below the limit can be set as required.

230V devices: Reduced overload capacity (approx.) due to pulse frequency (P504) and output frequency
Output frequency [Hz]
Pulse frequency [kHz]
4.5 3.0 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0
3...8 200% 170% 150% 140% 130% 120% 110%
10 180% 153% 135% 126% 117% 108% 100%
12 160% 136% 120% 112% 104% 96% 95%
14 150% 127% 112% 105% 97% 90% 90%
16 140% 119% 105% 98% 91% 84% 85%

400V devices: Reduced overload capacity (approx.) due to pulse frequency (P504) and output frequency
Output frequency [Hz]
Pulse frequency [kHz]
4.5 3.0 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0
3...6 200% 170% 150% 140% 130% 120% 110%
8 165% 140% 123% 115% 107% 99% 90%
10 150% 127% 112% 105% 97% 90% 82%
12 130% 110% 97% 91% 84% 78% 71%
14 115% 97% 86% 80% 74% 69% 63%
16 100% 85% 75% 70% 65% 60% 55%

168 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


8 Additional information

8.5.4 Reduced output current due to mains voltage


The devices are designed with thermal characteristics according to the nominal output currents. Accordingly,
for lower mains voltages, higher currents cannot be taken off in order to maintain the stated power constant.
For mains voltages above 400v there is a reduction of the permissible continuous output current, which is
inversely proportional to the mains voltage, in order to compensate for the increased switching losses.

I / IN 1.2
1.2

1.1

0.9

k ( Unetz ) 0.8
Unetz

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4 0.4
320 340 360 380 400 420 440 460 480
320 Unetz
Mains voltage [V]
480

8.5.5 Reduced output current due to the heat sink temperature


The temperature of the heat sink in included in the calculation of the reduction of output current, so that at low
heat sink temperatures, a higher load capacity can be permitted, especially for higher pulse frequencies. At
high heat sink temperatures, the reduction is increased correspondingly. The ambient temperature and the
ventilation conditions for the device can therefore be optimally exploited.

8.6 Operation with FI circuit breakers


SK 500E frequency inverters are designed for operation with a 30mA all-current sensitive FI circuit breaker. If
several frequency inverters are operated on a single FI circuit breaker, the leakage currents to earth must be
reduced. Further details can be found in Section 2.11.9 - 2.11.10.

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 169


NORDAC SK 500E Manual

8.7 Maintenance and servicing information


In normal use, NORDAC 500E frequency inverters are maintenance free. Please note the "general data" in
Section 7.1.
If the frequency converter is being used in a dusty environment, then the cooling-vane surfaces should be
regularly cleaned with compressed air. If air intake filters have been built into the control cabinet, then these
should also be regularly cleaned or replaced.
If you contact our technical support, please have the precise device type (rating plate/display), accessories
and/or options, the software version used (P707) and the series number (rating plate) at hand.

Repairs
The device must be sent to the following address if it needs repairing:

NORD Electronic DRIVESYSTEMS GmbH


Tjüchkampstraße 37
26605 Aurich, Germany

For queries about repairs, please contact:

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG


Telephone: 04532 / 401-515
Fax: 04532 / 401-555

If a frequency inverter is sent in for repair, no liability can be accepted for any added components, e.g. such as
mains cables, potentiometer, external displays, etc.!

Please remove all non-original parts from the frequency inverter.

NOTE
If possible, the reason for returning the component/device should be stated. If necessary, at least
one contact should be stated in case of queries.
This is important in order to keep repair times as short and efficient as possible.
On request you can also obtain a suitable return good voucher from Getriebebau NORD.

Internet information
You can find the comprehensive manuals in German and in English on our Internet site.
www.nord.com

You can also obtain this manual from your local representative if necessary.

170 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 171
NORDAC SK 500E Manual

9 Keyword index

Control parameters ...................... 98


3 F
Control terminals ........................ 101
3-Wire-Control ............................ 111 FI circuit-breaker ............ 10, 37, 169
Control voltage ............................. 33
Functional safety.......................... 34
A CSA ............................................. 11

Accessories .................................... 9 cUL .............................................. 11 H


Adapter cable RJ12 ................ 45, 49 Current vector control .................. 96 Heat dissipation ........................... 13

Additional parameters ................ 120 HTL encoder ...................... 112, 116


D
Array Parameter .......................... 68
DC Brake ..................................... 89 I
Array- Parameter .................... 55, 60
DC-coupling ................................. 35 2
I t limit ........................................ 146
AS Interface ................................. 77
DeviceNet .................................... 76 IEC 61800-3 ................................ 11

B Digital inputs .............................. 110 Incremental encoders .................. 50

Baking resistor ............................. 32 Dimensions ............................ 14, 15 Information ................................. 131

Basic parameters ................... 79, 86 Direct current braking ................... 89 Input monitoring ......................... 125

Brake chopper ........................ 22, 32 Display and operation .......... 52, 145 Installation ................................... 13

Brake control ................................ 88 Dissipated heat ............................ 13 Installation information ................. 10

Brake resistor ............................... 22 Distance calculator....................... 89 InterBus ....................................... 76

Brake ventilation time ................... 91 DS-standard motor....................... 92 Interference emission ................ 165

Braking distance ........................... 89 Dynamic braking .......................... 22 Interference immunity ................ 165

Braking resistor .................. 151, 153 Internet ...................................... 170


E
Breaking control ........................... 91 ISD control ................................... 96
EC declaration of conformity ...... 164
Brief instructions ........................... 79 IT networks ...................... 31, 36, 37
EEC-Directive EEC/89/336 ........ 164

C Efficiency ..................................... 13 J
Cable duct .................................... 13 Electrical connection .................... 29 Jumper ......................................... 36

CANbus .................................. 45, 49 Electrical data 115V ................... 151

Electrical data 230V ................... 151 K


CANopen.......................... 45, 49, 75
Electrical data 400V ................... 153 KTY84............................ 80, 84, 102
CE mark ..................................... 164

Charging error ............................ 146 EMC directive............................... 11


L
ColdPlate.......... 7, 8, 12, 15, 17, 157 EMC standard ............................ 164
Leading function ........................ 120
Commissioning............................. 78 EMV- Kit ....................................... 21
Leakage current ........................... 37
Condition on delivery .................... 79 EN 61000 ................................... 165
Lifting equipment with brake ........ 88
Connection data............................ 31 EN 61800-3 ................................ 165
Line choke ................................... 25
Connection of the control unit....... 39 Encoder ....................................... 50
Linear rev./f. characteristic curve . 96
Connection of the control unit Errors ......................................... 145
Load drop .................................... 88
SK 5x0E ................................... 42 External control voltage ............... 33
Load factory settings .................. 124
Connection of the control unit External heat sink technology ..........
SK 5x5E ................................... 46 ............................. 7, 8, 15, 17, 18 Long-term storage ..................... 150

172 Subject to technical alterations BU 0500 GB


9 Keyword index

Low voltage guideline .....................2 ParameterBox .............................. 62 SK CO1- ...................................... 27

ParameterBox parameters ........... 69 SK EMC 1- ................................... 21


M
Parameterisation .................... 59, 82 SK TU3-CTR ................................ 56
Magnetizing ..................................95
PC-Slave ...................................... 72 SK TU3-PAR ................................ 62
Mains supply ................................31
PI- process controler .................. 162 Slip compensation........................ 94
Mains voltage monitoring............125
Posicon ...................................... 131 Speed ........................................ 127
Master-Slave ..............................120
PotentiometerBox ....................... 128 Speed measurement with HTL
Menu group ..................................82 encoder .......................... 112, 116
Power limitation .......................... 166
Menu structure ParameterBox ......70 Standard design ............................. 9
Power-up cycles ......................... 150
Minimum configuration .................79 Storage ...................................... 150
Process controller ..... 102, 112, 118,
Modulation degree ........................95 162 Synchronising devices ................. 30

Motor cable / length ......................32 Profibus ........................................ 75 System error .............................. 149

Motor cables .................................27 Properties ....................................... 8


T
Motor data ..............................78, 92 PTC connection............................ 33
Technical data............................ 150
Motor list .......................................92 Pulse frequency ......................... 120
Technology unit.............................. 9
Motor Temperatur .......................102 Pulse switch-off .................. 124, 125
Temperature switch ..................... 22
Motor temperature ..................80, 84
Q Temperature, Motor ..................... 80
Motor thermistor ...........................33
Queries....................................... 170 Terminal blocks ...................... 40, 41
Motor type ......................................7
Thermistor .................................... 33
Multi-function relay .......................31 R
Tightening torque ......................... 31
Multiple motor use ........................32 Rating plate .................................. 78
Torque current limit ...................... 90
Reduced output power ............... 166
O Torque precontrol......................... 94
Remote control ........................... 110
OFF ............................................146 TTL encoder................................. 50
RJ12 ....................................... 45, 49
Operating displays ........................84 Type code .................................... 12
RJ45 ....................................... 45, 49
Operating time ............................133
Rotation direction ....................... 126 U
Oscillation damping ......................95
Rotation speed ........................... 135 UL .............................................. 154
Output choke ................................27
UL approval.................................. 11
Output monitoring .......................125 S
USS Time Out ............................ 147
Overcurrent ................................146 Safe pulse block ........................... 34
Overtemperature ........................145 Safety instructions .......................... 2 V
Overvoltage ................................146 Select language ........................... 65 Vector control ............................... 96
Overvoltage switch-off ..................22 Setpoint card ±10V ....................... 51 Ventilation .................................... 13

Setpoint processing .................... 160


P W
Setup altitude ............................. 150
Parameter identification ................97 Watchdog ................................... 116
SK BR2- / SK BR4- ...................... 23
Parameter loss ...........................147 Weight .................................... 14, 20
SK CI1-......................................... 25
Parameter monitoring .................138 Wiring guidelines.......................... 28

BU 0500 GB Subject to technical alterations 173

You might also like